Yamaha RX-V800RDS Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V800RDS

Categorie: Ontvanger

Type: Handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia ID

V624940

RX-V800RDS

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

G B

RX-V800RDS

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

0100V800RDS(GB)-cv1/4 8/29/0, 10:02 AM1

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the

right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit

— away from direct sunlight, heat sources,

vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical

shock, do not place this unit where it may get

exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this

unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room

with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside

this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause

electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this

unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation.

If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal

injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified

is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this

unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be

held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical

storm.

14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/

or liquid drops inside this unit.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods

of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

■ For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the

plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and

an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the

instructions described below.

Note

• The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a

plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live

socket outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K.

Model

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED

IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING

CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

apparatus may not correspond with the coloured

markings identifying the terminals in your plug,

proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected

to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or

coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured

BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is

marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth

terminal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS ........................................................... 1

FEATURES ............................................................ 2

GETTING STARTED ........................................... 3

Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ........................ 4

Front Panel ............................................................... 4

Remote Control ........................................................ 6

Description of the Numeric Buttons......................... 7

Using the Remote Control ........................................ 8

Front Panel Display .................................................. 9

Rear Panel .............................................................. 10

PREPARATION

SPEAKER SETUP .............................................. 11

Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 11

Speaker Placement ................................................. 11

CONNECTIONS ................................................. 12

Before Connecting Components ............................ 12

Connecting Audio Components ............................. 12

Connecting Video Components .............................. 14

Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 16

Connecting to an External Amplifier ..................... 18

Connecting an External Decoder ............................ 18

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ....................... 19

Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 19

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ......................... 20

OSD Modes ............................................................ 20

Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 20

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ......................... 21

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items

1A through 1E .................................................... 21

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER

OUTPUT LEVELS ......................................... 22

Before You Begin ................................................... 22

Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 22

BASIC OPERATION

BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 24

Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26

Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 28

Normal Stereo Reproduction .................................. 29

TUNING ............................................................... 30

Connecting the Antennas ........................................ 30

Automatic (or Manual) Tuning .............................. 31

Presetting Stations .................................................. 32

Tuning in to a Preset Station .................................. 33

Exchanging Preset Stations .................................... 34

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS .......................... 35

Description of RDS Data ........................................ 35

Changing the RDS Mode ....................................... 35

PTY SEEK Function .............................................. 36

EON Function ........................................................ 37

BASIC RECORDING ......................................... 38

ADVANCED OPERATION

SET MENU .......................................................... 39

Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU................. 39

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 40

2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 42

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the

left and right main speakers) .............................. 43

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 43

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) ......... 43

6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 44

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 44

8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 44

9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 44

10 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ............... 45

11 DTS LFE LEVEL ............................................ 45

12 6.1/ES AUTO ................................................... 45

13 SP DELAY TIME ............................................ 46

14 DISPLAY SET ................................................. 46

15 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 46

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT

SPEAKERS ...................................................... 47

SLEEP TIMER .................................................... 48

Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 48

Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 48

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................. 49

Selector Dial ........................................................... 49

Commonly Used Buttons in Any Position of the

Selector Dial ....................................................... 50

Controlling the Components

Connected to This Unit ...................................... 50

Button Names and Functions in Each Position ...... 51

Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 54

Programming a New Remote Control Function

(Learn Feature) ................................................... 55

Returning to the Factory Setting ............................ 56

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................. 57

Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 57

CINEMA DSP Programs ....................................... 58

MOVIE THEATER Programs ................................ 61

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER

EDITING ......................................................... 62

What is a sound field? ............................................ 62

Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 62

Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 63

Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 63

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions .......... 64

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 68

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 73

Thank you for selecting this YAMAHA AV receiver.

FEATURES

Other Features

◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter

◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 15 Items

for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video

System

◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance

Adjustment

◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other

Future Formats

◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing

Bass Response

◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in

Controlling This Unit

◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability

◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability

◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks

◆ Sleep Timer

◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes

and “Learning” Capability

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this

manual.

Built-in 5-Channel Power Amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS Output Power

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz)

Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω)

Center: 100 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω)

Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field

Processing

◆ Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP)

◆ Dolby Pro Logic Decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 Decoder

◆ DTS/DTS ES Decoder

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

or DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP

Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner

◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

◆ Automatic Preset Tuning

◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset

Editing)

◆ Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast Reception

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and

pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround” and “DTS ES” are

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Remote control

Installing Batteries in the Remote

Control

Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the

+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings

(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.

■ Notes on batteries

• Change the batteries periodically.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline

and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging

carefully as these different types of batteries may have

the same shape and color.

GETTING STARTED

Checking the Package Contents

Check your package to make sure it has the following items.

Manganese batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Quick Reference Card

■ Changing batteries

As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the

remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash

or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these

conditions, change all of the batteries.

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

Note

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately.

Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into

contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment

thoroughly before installing new batteries.

A/B/C/D/E

Quick Reference Card

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front Panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

Standby mode

In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

3 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit (see page 9).

4 INPUT MODE

Selects the mode of input for sources that send two or

more types of signals to this unit (see page 26).

You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH

INPUT as the input source.

5 INPUT l / h

Selects the input source (DVD, D-TV/LD, CBL/SAT,

VCR 1, VCR 2/DVR, V-AUX, PHONO, CD, TUNER,

CD-R, MD/TAPE) you want to listen to or watch.

6 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

7 6CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or

the input selector buttons).

8 SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel.

9 BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF

When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass

frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB

(60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This

boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer.

However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN

SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1D LFE/

BASS OUT” is set to SWFR.

0 PROCESSOR DIRECT ON/OFF

When pushed in (ON), BASS, TREBLE, and BASS

EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of

the original signal.

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

89 0

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

iopa

sdf

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

a RDS MODE/FREQ

When an RDS station is received, press this button to

change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode,

RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data

services) and/or frequency display mode in turn.

s EON

Press this button to select the desired program type

(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to

tune in to a radio program of that type automatically.

d PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode.

f PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after the

desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK

mode.

g BASS

Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the low-frequency response.

h TREBLE

Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the high-frequency response.

Note

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and

right main speakers.

■ Opening and closing the front

panel door

When you are not operating the controls behind the front

panel door, close the door.

q EFFECT

Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off.

If you turn off the output of these speakers by using

EFFECT, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except

for the LFE channel are directed to the main left and right

channels.

When Dolby Digital or DTS signals are mixed, the left

and right main channel signal levels may not match.

w A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).

e PROGRAM l / h

Selects the DSP program (see page 28).

r PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:)

appears next to the band indication on the front panel

display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon

(:) does not appear.

t PHONES jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.

y VIDEO AUX jacks

Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input

source.

u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the

colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset

station number and tuning.

This button is also used to exchange the assignment of

two preset stations with each other.

i FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

o MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

p TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.

To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so

that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel

display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this

button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up.

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

A/B/C/D/E

TV INPUT

TV VOLUME

TV POWER

EFFECT

Remote Control

This section describes the basic operation of this unit with

the remote control. First, set the selector dial to the AMP/

TUN position. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES”

on pages 49 to 56 for full details.

Select the

AMP/TUN

position.

See page 7.

1 DSP

Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the DSP

program selector (see page 7).

2 Indicator window

Shows the name of components which can be controlled.

3 Numeric buttons (Input selector buttons)

These buttons select the input source.

See pages 7 and 8 for the numeric buttons.

4 TEST

Outputs the test tone.

5 ON SCREEN

Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video

monitor.

6 j / i

Adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items.

7 LEVEL

Selects the effect speaker channel (center, rear and

subwoofer) so you can adjust their output level

independently.

8 SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

9 INPUT

Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the input

selector (see page 7).

0 Indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

q Selector dial

Turn this dial to select the position for the component to

be controlled. (The proper code must be set up for your

component. See “Setting the Manufacture Codes” on

page 54.) When the position is selected, the remote

control is set to that component operation mode.

w A/B/C/D/E, PRESET–/+

These buttons are used to select a preset station.

A/B/C/D/E: To select one of 5 preset station groups (A

to E)

PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8)

e u/d

Select DSP program parameters and SET MENU items.

r SET MENU

Enters the SET MENU.

t POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

y STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

A B

u VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

i MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output

to the previous volume level.

EFFECT

Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off

in the following cases:

• When the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position.

• While the indicator is lit for about 3 seconds after

pressing DSP.

Description of the Numeric

Buttons

The numeric buttons function in various ways depending

on the position of the selector dial or the combination of

other instructions.

■ When selecting an input source

Input selector

buttons

1 Press INPUT regardless of the position of

the selector dial.

The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds.

2 You can select an input source with the

numeric buttons while the indicator is lit.

■ When selecting a DSP program

and turning on or off the effect

speakers (center and rear)

DSP program

group buttons

1 Press DSP regardless of the position of the

selector dial.

The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds.

2 You can select a DSP program with the

numeric buttons, turn on or off the effect

speakers (center and rear) by pressing

EFFECT and turn on or off the Dolby Digital

Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder by pressing

6.1/ES while the indicator is lit.

1 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN

position.

2 You can select a DSP program directly with

the numeric buttons, turn on or off the effect

speakers (center and rear) by pressing

EFFECT and turn on or off the Dolby Digital

Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder by pressing

6.1/ES.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

STANDBY

/ON

–

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

30° 30°

■ When selecting a preset station

number

1 Set code number “0023” in the AMP/TUN (or

DSP/TUN) position.

See page 54 for setting the code.

2 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or

DSP/TUN) position.

3 You can select a preset station number

directly with the numeric buttons (1 to 8).

See page 34.

Using the Remote Control

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,

stove or bath;

– dusty places; or

– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

VOLUME

SLEEP

1 234 wq87

apio

uyre t

09 5

Front Panel Display

1 t indicator

Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on.

2 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP (see

page 29).

3 g and o indicators

Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit

is reproducing. “ g ” lights up when the built-

in Dolby Digital decoder is on. “ o ” lights up

when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on.

4 x indicator

Lights up when you select a DSP program.

5 DSP program indicators

The name of the selected DSP program lights up when

the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE

THEATER 2 or q/DTS SURROUND DSP program is

selected.

6 PTY HOLD indicator

Lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK

mode.

7 RDS mode indicators

The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently

received RDS station light(s) up. Illumination of the red

indicator next to the RDS data name shows that the

corresponding RDS mode is now selected.

8 EON indicator

Lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data

service is being received.

9 STEREO indicator

Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.

0 AUTO indicator

Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

q VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

w Input source indicator

Shows the current input source with the arrow-shaped

cursor.

e c indicator

Lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or

DTS ES decoder is on.

r v indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

t SP A/B indicator

Lights up according to which set of main speakers is

selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of

speakers are selected.

y Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

u Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

i MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored.

o Program type name indicators

The name of the selected program type lights up when the

“EON” indicator lights up.

p TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.

a SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

(Europe model)

Rear Panel

1 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

2 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

3 Antenna input terminals

See page 30 for connection information.

4 Audio component jacks

See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.

5 Video component jacks

See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.

6 Speaker terminals

See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.

7 OUTPUT jacks

See page 18 for connection information.

8 AC power cord

Connect to a power outlet.

9 AC OUTLET(S)

Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V

components (see page 19).

0 6CH INPUT jacks

See pages 13 and 18 for connection information.

q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your

speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode

before you change the setting of this switch (see page 19).

DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

SPEAKERS OUTPUT

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

(SURROUND)

TUNER

DIGITAL INPUT 6CH INPUT

MD/

TAP E

CD-R

DVD

ANT

GND

UNBAL.

D-TV

/LD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

(PLAY)

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

MD/TAPE

CBL

/SAT

OUT

(REC)

PHONO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

(PLAY)

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

L R L

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

R L

–

R L

D-TV/LD

MONITOR

OUT

–

– –

REAR

(SURROUND)

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

MAINS

876

As this terminal is used

for an examination in the

factory, do not connect

any equipment to this

terminal.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

Speakers to Be Used

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-

field quality with a 5-speaker system, using left and right

main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center

speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with

different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a

moving human voice and other types of sound may not

shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers

from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same

tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound

plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers

from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are

used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center

speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If

for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker,

you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained

with the full system.

The main speakers should be high-performance models

and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other

speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For

precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use

high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over

the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.

■ Use of a subwoofer expands your

sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when

the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back.

The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.

Speaker Placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

Main

speaker (L)

Center speaker

Main speaker (R)

Rear speaker (R)

Rear speaker (L)

1.8 m

■ Main speakers

Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance of each

speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the

same.

■ Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position,

facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet)

above the floor.

■ Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front

face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to

the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the

monitor and centrally between the main speakers.

Note

• If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will

be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case,

“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see

page 41 for details).

■ Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better

to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall

reflections.

CAUTION

Some types of speakers interfere with a video monitor.

If this problem occurs, move the speakers away from

the monitor. If you cannot avoid installing the center

speaker or subwoofer near the video monitor, use a

magnetically shielded speaker.

PREPARATION

Subwoofer

CONNECTIONS

Before Connecting Components

CAUTION

Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been

completed.

• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some

components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions

for each component to be connected to this unit.

• When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or

changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling

system to all its products.

• After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.

Connecting Audio Components

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of

digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital

and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to

both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given

to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital

signals (see page 25 for details).

• You can designate the input for each digital jack according to

your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET

MENU (see page 44 for details).

About the dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack

before you connect the fiber optic cable.

Do not discard the cap. When you are not

using the optical jack, be sure to put the

cap back in place. This cap protects the

jack from dust.

Note

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.

If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this

standard, this unit may not function properly.

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

• The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It

simply reduces noise in the signal. In some cases, you may

hear less noise if you do not connect to the GND terminal.

■ Connecting a CD player

• The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a

CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks.

• When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and

OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from

the COAXIAL CD jack.

■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape

deck or CD recorder

• Only digital signals input from a source such as a CD or DVD

are output from the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

• When you connect your recording component to both the

analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given

to the digital signal.

• You can connect an MD recorder to any digital input jack by

using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see

page 44).

Notes

• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its

power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may

distort the sound from other components.

• When you record from a source component connected to this

unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded

sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this

unit.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

TUNER

DIGITAL INPUT 6CH INPUT

MD/

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

ANT

GND

UNBAL.

D-TV

/LD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

(PLAY)

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT

DVD

PR/

S VIDEO VIDEO

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

MD/TAPE

CBL

/SAT

OUT

(REC)

PHONO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

(PLAY)

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

L R L

D-TV/LD

PR/

MONITOR

OUT

PR/

OUTPUT

GND

L R

INPUT OUTPUT INPUTOUTPUT

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

CENTER OUTPUT

MAIN

OUTPUT

SURROUND

OUTPUT

L R

MD recorder or

tape deck

indicates signal direction

indicates coaxial cables

CD recorder

CD player

Turntable

External decoder

See page 18.

indicates left analog cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates optical cables

(Europe model)

CONNECTIONS

PR/

Connecting Video Components

■ About the video jacks

There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composit video

signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals.

The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (P

, P

) video signals. The jacks are also separated

into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component

(e.g. Y, C

, C

/Y, P

, P

/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction.

If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the

S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks

on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

VIDEO jack

(composite)

S VIDEO jack COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks

• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input

through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are

output through the corresponding composite video, S-video,

and component jacks, respectively.

• If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary

to make composite video connections. If both types of

connections are made, this unit gives priority to the S-video

signal.

• You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A

and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O

ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 44 for details).

Notes

• Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when

connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

• When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being

connected.

■ Video monitor with a 21-pin connector

Make a connection as shown on page 15 with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable.

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

These jacks are used to connect any video input source

such as a game console to this unit.

S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

AUDIO OUT R

AUDIO OUT L

VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL OUT

S VIDEO OUT

Game console

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

TUNER

DIGITAL INPUT 6CH INPUT

MD/

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

ANT

GND

UNBAL.

D-TV

/LD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

(PLAY)

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

MD/TAPE

CBL

/SAT

OUT

(REC)

PHONO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

(PLAY)

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

L R L

D-TV/LD

MONITOR

OUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO INPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

COMPONENT

INPUT

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

S S

Note

• If your LD player has an Dolby Digital RF signal output jack, connect it to this unit

through an RF demodulator (separately purchased).

indicates signal direction

indicates left analog cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates S-video cables

TV/digital TV or

LD player

DVD player

Cable TV or

Satellite tuner

VCR 1 or VCR 2/

DVR (digital

video recorder)

Video monitor

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

indicates video cables

(Europe model)

LD player

No connection

SCART-plug

*1 You can connect the Dolby

Digital RF signal output of

your LD player to the

COAXIAL jack by using

“7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on

the SET MENU (see

page 44).

demodulator

CONNECTIONS

Connecting the Speakers

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage the unit and/or speakers.

If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers

in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.

■ Speaker cables

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One of the cables is colored or

shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation

from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable

together to prevent short circuits.

■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either

of the MAIN A or B terminals.

■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

10 mm (3/8”)

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

SPEAKERS OUTPUT

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

(SURROUND)

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

R L

–

R L

–

– –

REAR

(SURROUND)

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

MAINS

Main speakers A

Right Left

Main speakers B

Right Left

(Europe model)

Center speaker Rear speakers

Right Left

Subwoofer

system

Subwoofer connection

See “SUBWOOFER jack” on page 18.

CONNECTIONS

Connecting to an External

Amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the OUTPUT jacks as follows.

Note

• When RCA pin plugs are connected to the OUTPUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

1 MAIN jacks

Main channel line output jacks.

Note

• The signals output through these jacks are affected by the

BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION settings.

2 SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system

to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main,

center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack. (The

cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or

DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to

this jack.

Notes

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. The subwoofer volume cannot be adjusted from

this unit.

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “10A LFE

LEVEL” and “11 DTS LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU,

some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.

3 CENTER jack

Center channel line output jack.

4 REAR (SURROUND) jacks

Rear channel line output jacks.

OUTPUT

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

R L

REAR

(SURROUND)

Connecting an External Decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left

and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND

and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from

an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the

6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and

surround channels.

Notes

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot listen to DSP programs.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing

items 1A to 1E on the SET MENU is not affected.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

MAINS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit

may be damaged.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may

not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby

mode.

Select the left or right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch

only when this unit is in the standby mode.

Switch

position

Speaker Impedance level

Main

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Center

The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.

Rear

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

Right

Main

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.

Center

The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.

Rear

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Left

Connecting the Power Supply Cords

After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if

you will not use this unit for a long period of time.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

Europe model ............................................... 2 OUTLETS

U.K. model ..................................................... 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

components to this unit. The power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply

power to any connected component whenever this unit is

turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W.

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

MAINS

SWITCHED

(Europe model)

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

To AC outlet

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)

Full display Short display

You can display the operation information for this unit on

a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP

program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier

to see the available options and parameters than it is by

reading this information on the front panel display.

• If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is

superimposed over the image.

• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will

not be recorded with any video signal.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when

a video source is not being reproduced (or the source

component is turned off) by using “14 DISPLAY SET” on the

SET MENU (see page 46).

OSD Modes

You can change the amount of information the OSD

shows.

Full display

This mode always shows the DSP program parameter

settings on the video monitor (see page 63).

Short display

This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front

panel display at the bottom of the screen and then

disappears.

Display off

This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at

the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards,

no changes to operations appear on the monitor except

those of the ON SCREEN button.

P01 CONCERT HALL

INIT. DLY

45ms

ROOM SIZE 1.0

LIVENESS

P01 CONCERT HALL

• When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h,

VOLUME and some other types of operation information are

displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that

for the front panel display.

• The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the

OSD mode.

Selecting the OSD Mode

1 When you turn on the power, the video

monitor and front panel display show the

level of the main volume for a few seconds

and then switch to show the current DSP

program.

2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control

repeatedly to change the display mode.

The OSD mode changes in the following order: full

display, short display, and display off.

Notes

• If you choose a video input source that has a component

connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN

jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO

OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is

output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks.

However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no

video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video

and composite video signals.

• If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to

connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see

the OSD.

• Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or

video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS

This unit has 5 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your

configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings

as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change the

settings on the SET MENU (see page 39).

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1E

Item Description Initial setting

1A CENTER SP Selects the center channel output mode according to the size of the center speaker.

The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE.

LRG

1B MAIN SP Selects the main channel output mode according to the size of the main speakers.

The possible settings are LARGE and SMALL.

LARGE

1C REAR L/R SP Selects the rear channel output mode according to the size of the rear speakers.

The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE.

LRG

1D LFE/BASS OUT Selects a speaker for the LFE signal output and low bass signal.

The possible settings are SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, and BOTH.

BOTH

1E MAIN LEVEL Selects the output level for the main channel signal.

The possible settings are Normal and –10 dB.

Normal

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

This section explains how to adjust the speaker output

levels by using the test tone generator. When this

adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening

position will be the same from each speaker. This is

important for the best performance of the digital sound

field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby

Digital decoder and DTS decoder.

Note

• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are

connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from

the PHONES jack when using the test tone.

Before You Begin

1 Press STANDBY/ON to

turn on the power. Turn on

the video monitor.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of the

main speakers, press both A

and B.

3 Set BASS and TREBLE on the front panel to

the center position and set BASS

EXTENSION to OFF.

Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY

SUR.)

Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the 5

speakers required for a surround sound system. The

adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at

your listening position with the remote control. After

completing the adjustments, use VOLUME +/– at your

listening position to check if the adjustments are

satisfactory.

1 Set the selector dial to the

AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)

position.

2 Press TEST to output the test tone.

3 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test

tone.

The test tone is heard from the left main speaker,

center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker

and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced

for 2.5 seconds each time.

BASS

–

TREBLE

–

LEFT SURROUND

(TEST L SUR.)

RIGHT SURROUND

(TEST R SUR.)

CENTER

(TEST CENTER)

RIGHT

(TEST RIGHT)

LEFT

(TEST LEFT)

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

2,6

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

ON OFF

Set to OFF.

STANDBY

/ON

SPEAKERS

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONSADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

The state of the test tone output is also shown on the

monitor by an image of the audio listening room.

This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.

• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

center channel sound is automatically output from the left and

right main speakers.

Note

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the

unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.

4 Press LEVEL repeatedly

to select the speaker to be

adjusted.

• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker to be

adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in

the reverse order.)

5 Press j / i repeatedly to

adjust the output level of

the effect speakers so that

the output level coming

from each speaker is the

same.

While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the

selected speaker.

6 When the adjustment is complete, press

TEST.

The test tone stops and the

current DSP program appears

on the front panel display and

on the video monitor.

• The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using

“5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 43).

• You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers

(center, left rear and right rear) to +10 dB. If the output level of

these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even

after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to

+10 dB, set “1E MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB

(see page 42). This setting decreases the main speaker output

level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set

“1E MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the

levels for the center and rear speakers again.

TEST DOLBY SUR.

LEFT

BASIC PLAYBACK

3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one

of the input selector buttons) to select the

input source.

• The current input source is indicated on the front

panel display with an arrow.

• The current input source name and input mode

appear on the front panel display and on the video

monitor for a few seconds.

Front panel

Remote control

Selected input source

BASIC OPERATION

When using the remote control, set the selector dial to

the AMP/TUN position.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of

main speakers, press both A

and B.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to turn on

the power. Turn on the video monitor.

The front panel display and the video monitor show

the level of the main volume for a few seconds and

then switch to show the current DSP program.

Select this: To reproduce the signal from

this component

DVD: DVD player

D-TV/LD: TV or digital TV/LD player

CBL/SAT: Cable TV/satellite tuner

VCR 1: Video cassette deck 1

VCR 2/DVR: Video cassette deck 2/digital

video recorder

V-AUX: Another A/V component

(connected to the VIDEO AUX

jacks on the front panel)

PHONO: Turntable

CD: CD player

TUNER: AM/FM tuner

CD-R: CD recorder

MD/TAPE: MD recorder/tape deck

INPUT

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

353

Front panel

Remote controlFront panel

STANDBY

/ON

SPEAKERS

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

6CH INPUT

PROGRAM

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks

Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the

front panel display and on the video monitor.

Front panel

Remote control

Notes

• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on

the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector

buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the

front panel display and the video monitor.

• If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press 6CH INPUT.

4 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the

component.

5 Adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS

EXTENSION etc. These controls are only effective

for sound from the main speakers.

Front panel

Note

• If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR

OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the

reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be

lowered. In these cases, turn on the component.

6 Use the digital sound field processor.

See page 28.

Front panel

Remote control

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the

remote control.

To restore the audio output to

the previous volume level,

press MUTE again.

• You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as

VOLUME +/–.

• During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the front panel

display and on the video monitor.

■ When you have finished using

this unit

Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set

this unit in the standby mode.

■ Notes on the digital signal

The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle

96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a

source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and

set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation

instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-

kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:

1. The following indication will appear on the front panel

display.

2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be

output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the

left and right main speakers.

Note

• If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL or “1D

LFE/BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output

from the subwoofer.

3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on

page 47 cannot be made.

VOLUME

BASS

–

TREBLE

–

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

ON OFF

Front panel Remote control

BASIC PLAYBACK

INPUT MODE

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to combine a video image

from a video source with a sound from an audio source.

(For example, you can listen to classical music while you

are watching a video.)

Select a source from the video group and then select a

source from the audio group with the input selector

buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does

not work if you select the sources with INPUT l / h on

the front panel.

Input Modes and Indications

This unit comes with various input jacks. If your

component is connected to more than one type of input

jack, you can set the priority of the input signal.

When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode

is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU

(see page 44 for details).

Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector

button that you have pressed to select the

input source on the remote control)

repeatedly until the desired input mode is

shown on the front panel display and on the

video monitor.

Front panel

Remote control

Input mode

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is

automatically selected in the following

order:

1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal

2) Digital (PCM) signal

3) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal

encoded with DTS is selected even if

another signal is input at the same time.

ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is

selected even if a digital signal is input at

the same time.

Notes

• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is

selected.

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the

type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate

setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source.

• The sound output may be interrupted for some LD and DVD

players in the following situation: The input mode is set to

AUTO. A search is performed while playing the disc encoded

with Dolby Digital or DTS, and then disc playing is restored.

The sound output is interrupted for a moment because the

digital signal was selected again.

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ Notes on playing a source

encoded with a DTS signal

• If the digital output data of the player has been

processed in any way, you may not be able to

perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital

connection between this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and

set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces

the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you

want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the

source to a digital input jack and set the input mode

to AUTO or DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit

reproduces no sound.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and

set the input mode to AUTO, there will be a moment

of noise while the unit recognizes the DTS signal and

turns on the DTS decoder. This is not a malfunction.

You can avoid this by setting the input mode to DTS

beforehand.

• If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS

signal with the input mode setting left to AUTO, this

unit automatically switches to the “DTS-decoding”

mode to prevent noise from being generated during

subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights

up on the front panel display.) The “t” indicator

will flash immediately after playback of a source

encoded with a DTS signal has finished. Only a

source encoded with a DTS signal can be played

back while this indicator is flashing. If you want to

play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode

back to AUTO.

• The “t” indicator will flash when the input mode

is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is

performed while playing back a source encoded with

a DTS signal. If this status continues for 30 or more

seconds, the unit will automatically switch from the

“DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input

mode and the “t” indicator will go out.

■ Notes on playing an LD source

• For LD software that does not contain a digital

soundtrack, connect the LD player to the analog jacks

and set the input mode to AUTO or ANALOG.

• If the LD player is transmitting a signal by a non-

standard method, this unit cannot detect the Dolby

Digital or DTS signal. In this case, the decoder

automatically switches to PCM or analog.

• Some A/V components such as LD players output

different audio signals through their analog and digital

jacks. Change the input mode as necessary.

• While you are operating the LD player and playing a

disc encoded with a Dolby Digital signal, if you

switch from the pause or chapter forwarding function

to normal playback, you may hear the PCM or analog

sound an instant before the Dolby Digital signal is

played.

BASIC PLAYBACK

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

Selecting a Sound Field Program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. For details about each program, see pages

57 to 60.

1 Press DSP on the remote

control.

The indicator lights up for

about 3 seconds.

Remote control

• If the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position, skip this

step.

2 Use the numeric buttons to select the

desired program before the indicator goes

off (or press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly on

the front panel).

• For example, to select the sub-program

“Spectacle”, press MOVIE THEATER 1

repeatedly.

• The name of the selected program appears on the

front panel display and on the video monitor.

PROGRAM

Front panel

Remote control

Program group

Program name (sub-program)

Notes

• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and

not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening

room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections

in your room to maximize the effect created by the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source

and DSP program are memorized and are automatically

selected when you turn on the power again.

• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode

is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the

appropriate decoding program.

• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/

Normal or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard

from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only

be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER

SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel

sound is output from the main speakers.

• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit

is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the

DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is

reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

EFFECT

■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS

ES decoder

If you want to use the Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS

ES software, press 6.1/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital

Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder (see “12 6.1/ES AUTO”

on pages 45 and 60 for details).

Remote control

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT

CINEMA DSP

You can experience the virtual CINEMA DSP sound field

by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to

NONE. The sound field processing is changed to the

Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected

DSP program. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by

using the main speakers. You can also listen to SILENT

CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the

PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is

on.

Note

• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases:

– when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal or DTS/

Normal program is selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;

– when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones.

Front panel

Remote control

• If the selector dial is set to a position other than the DSP/TUN

position, first press DSP and then EFFECT on the remote

control.

Notes

• If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the

center and rear speakers.

• If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is

automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear

speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.

• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the

sound effect or if you set “10B D-RANGE” on the SET MENU

to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.

Normal Stereo Reproduction

Press EFFECT to turn off the sound effect

for normal stereo reproduction.

Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back

on.

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

The “ c ” indicator lights up.

TUNING

Connecting the Antennas

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal

strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A

good earth ground is a metal stake

driven into moist earth.

■ Connecting the indoor FM

antenna

Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω

UNBAL. FM ANT terminal.

Note

• Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM

antenna at the same time.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal

hole.

2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into

the AM ANT and GND terminals.

DIGITAL OUTPUT

TUNER

DIGITAL INPUT

MD/

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

ANT

GND

UNBAL.

D-TV

/LD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

CBL

/SAT

Antenna stand

3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires.

Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good

connection.

4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna

stand.

5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best

reception is obtained.

• The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and

attached to a wall, etc.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA

dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.

(Europe model)

Connecting a coaxial cable to the included

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model

only)

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Cover

Unit: mm

(inch)

Lead wire

Clamp with

pliers.

Clamp

with

pliers.

Insert the wire

into the slot.

Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

Cut the external sleeve of

the 75-ohm coaxial cable

and prepare it for

connection.

Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

Insert the cable wire into the

slot, and clamp it with

pliers.

Snap the cover into

place.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not

stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.

• When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up

and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front

panel display. If an RDS station that offers the PS data service

is being received, the station name is shown instead of the

frequency on the front panel display.

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune in to it manually.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from

the front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display

next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING

(EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display

next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING

(EDIT) to turn it off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue the tuning search.

Note

• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change

the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.

INPUT

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h once to

begin automatic tuning.

Press h to tune in to a higher

frequency, or press l to tune

in to a lower frequency. Press

the same button again if the

tuning search does not stop at

the desired station.

PRESET/

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Goes off

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAIN

MPRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

SLEEP

Turn this indicator off.

PRESET/

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

Automatic (or Manual) Tuning

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Press INPUT l / h to

select TUNER as the input

source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Lights up

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAIN

MPRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

SLEEP

Turn this indicator off.

TUNING

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”

indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds,

automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency

currently displayed toward the higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

AUTO

FM/AM

Presetting Stations

■ Automatically presetting stations

(for RDS stations)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

RDS stations. This function enables the unit to

automatically tune in to RDS stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those

stations in order. (See pages 35 to 37 for details on RDS

stations.) This feature enables you to easily tune in to any

preset station by selecting the preset station number (see

page 33).

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset

number.

• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or

AM station by simply following the procedure in the section

“Manually presetting stations” on page 33.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only RDS stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually

in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure

in “Manually presetting stations” on page 33. (There may be

a case that this unit cannot receive a station which could be

received by using the automatic tuning method. This is

because this unit receives a large amount of PI (Program

Identification) data along with the station.)

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which the unit

will store RDS stations and/or begin tuning toward

lower frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning

begins (after pressing MEMORY in step 3):

1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop

when stations have all been stored up to E8.

2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the

colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to

begin tuning toward lower frequencies.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

Lights up

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

ESLEEP

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5

groups) manually.

1 Tune in to a station.

See page 31 for tuning instructions.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about

5 seconds.

Flashes

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears and make sure that the

colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to

the band indication.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher

preset station number. Press l

to select a lower preset station

number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear on the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

Tuning in to a Preset Station

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

You can also tune a preset station with the remote control.

Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position and press

TUNER to select TUNER as the input source.

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAIN

MPRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

SLEEP

PRESET/

TUNING

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY

TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

Shows the displayed station has been stored as A1.

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

2,5

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

TUNING

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or

PRESET –/+) to select a preset station

number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.

Front panel

Remote control

Exchanging Preset Stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Tune in to preset station “E1”.

See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on page 33.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the

buttons on the front panel.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET/

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

Front panel

Remote control

1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station

group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.

• You can select the preset station number with the numeric

buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control if code number “0023”

has been set up in the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position.

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY

TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

YPTY

PTY

HOLD

NEON

NEWS INFO AF

FNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY

ZONE 2

SLEEP

PSPS

PTYPTY

RTRT

CTCT

PTYPTY

HOLDHOLD

EONEON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORTNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DIGITALDIGITAL

DSP

6.1/ES6.1/ES

PCMPCM

PRO LOGICPRO LOGIC

VIRTUALVIRTUAL

ZONE 2

SLEEP

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

NZONE 2

ESLEEP

Shows the exchange of stations

has been completed.

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

2,4

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system

by FM stations in many countries. Stations using this

system transmit an inaudible stream of data in addition to

the normal radio signal.

RDS data contains various information such as PI

(Program Identification), PS (Program Service name),

PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time),

EON (Enhanced Other Networks), etc. The RDS function

is carried out among the network stations.

Description of RDS Data

This unit can receive PI, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data

when receiving RDS broadcasting stations.

■ PS (Program Service name)

mode:

The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.

■ PTY (Program Type) mode:

The program type on the RDS station being received is

displayed. There are 15 program types to classify RDS

stations. You can make this unit search for a station which

is broadcasting a program of the desired type. See

page 36 for details.

■ RT (Radio Text) mode:

Information about the program (such as the title of the

song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being

received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric

characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other

characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with

under-bars.

■ CT (Clock Time) mode:

The current time is displayed and updated every minute.

If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may

appear.

■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks):

See page 37.

Changing the RDS Mode

The four modes are available in this unit for displaying

RDS data. When an RDS station is being received, PS,

PTY, RT and/or CT mode indicators that correspond to

the RDS data services offered by the station light up on

the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/FREQ

repeatedly to change the display mode among the RDS

data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown

below. Illumination of the red indicator next to the RDS

mode indicator shows that the corresponding RDS mode

is now selected.

Notes

• When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS

MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up

on the front panel display. If you press the button before the

indicators light up on the front panel display, the mode cannot

be changed. This is because the unit has not yet received all of

the RDS data on the station.

• RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.

• The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the

received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode

requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible

that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS

modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed.

• RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception

conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO”

indicator goes off from the front panel display. Although the

reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when

you change the display to RDS mode, RDS data may be

displayed.

• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference

during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service

may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front

panel display.

PS mode

PTY mode

RT mode

CT mode

Frequency

display mode

RDS MODE

/FREQ

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

PTY SEEK Function

If you select the desired program type, the unit

automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are

broadcasting a program of the required type.

1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in the

PTY SEEK mode.

The program type of the station being received or

“NEWS” flashes on the front panel display.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the

desired program type.

The selected program type appears on the front panel

display.

3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching

all preset RDS stations.

The selected program type flashes and the “PTY

HOLD” indicator lights up on the front panel display

while searching for stations.

• If a station that is broadcasting a program of the

required type is found, the unit stops at that

station.

• If the called station is not the desired one, press

PTY SEEK START again. The unit begins

searching for another station that is broadcasting a

program of the same type.

■ To cancel this function

Press PTY SEEK MODE twice.

■ Program types in the PTY mode

There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations.

NEWS News

AFFAIRS Current affairs

INFO General information

SPORT Sports

EDUCATE Education

DRAMA Drama

CULTURE Culture

SCIENCE Science

VARIED Light entertainment

POP M Pops

ROCK M Rock

M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-

listening)

LIGHT M Light classics

CLASSICS Serious classics

OTHER M Other music

Flashes

The selected program

type flashes.

Light up

PTY SEEK

MODE

START

VIRTUAL

PRESET/

TUNING

PTY SEEK

MODE START

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY

TUNED

ZZONE 2

SSLEEP

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

EON Function

This function uses the EON data service on the RDS

station network. If you simply select the desired program

type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit

automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are

scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and

switches from the station being currently received to the

new station when the broadcasts starts.

Note

• This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers

the EON data service is being received. When such a station is

being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the front

panel display.

1 Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up

on the front panel display.

If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to

another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator

lights up.

2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired

program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or

SPORT).

The selected program type name indicator lights up

on the front panel display.

• If a preset RDS station of the selected program

type starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically

switch from the program being currently received

to that program. The program type name indicator

flashes.

• When broadcasting of the required program ends,

the previously received station (or another

program on the same station) is recalled.

■ To cancel this function

Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights

up on the front panel display.

Lights up

Flashes

DTS

6.1/ES

PCM

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

IRTUAL

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

EON

DTS

6.1/ES

PCM

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

IRTUAL

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

DTS

6.1/ES

PCM

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

IRTUAL

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

DTS

6.1/ES

PCM

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

IRTUAL

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

BASIC RECORDING

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for these components.

1 Turn on the power to the unit and all

connected component.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

Front panel

Remote control

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION,

VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP

programs does not affect the recorded material.

• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot

be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal by your VCR.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material

may infringe copyright laws.

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when

recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS

Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded as

follows:

• LDs

Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the

analog soundtrack.

• DVDs

Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-

channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or

Dolby Digital soundtrack.

• CDs

The DTS signal recorded on CDs can only be output

as a digital bitstream, and therefore cannot be

recorded.

INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON PTY SEEK

MODE

START

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

TUNER

DSP

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Adjusting the Items on the SET

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

Note

• Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.

1 Set the selector dial to the

AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)

position.

2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to

15) you want to adjust.

• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the

same order as when pressing d.

4 Press j or i once to enter the setup mode of

the selected item.

The last setting you adjusted appears on the video

monitor or on the front panel display.

SET MENU

ADVANCED OPERATION

3,6

4,5

The SET MENU consists of 15 items including the

speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and

parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate

item and adjust or select the values as necessary.

• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a

source.

• We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU

while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video

monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit

while adjusting the items.

Note

• The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of

the OSD.

1 SPEAKER SET

1A CENTER SP

1B MAIN SP

1C REAR L/R SP

1D LFE/BASS OUT

1E MAIN LEVEL

2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

5 CENTER GEQ

6 INPUT RENAME

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

8 INPUT MODE

9 PARAM. INI

10 DOLBY D. SET

10A LFE LEVEL

10B D-RANGE

11 DTS LFE LEVEL

12 6.1/ES AUTO

13 SP DELAY TIME

14 DISPLAY SET

15 MEMORY GUARD

SET MENU 1/4

1 SPEAKER SET

2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

:Up/Down

–/+ Enter

SET MENU 1/4

1 SPEAKER SET

2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

:Up/Down

–/+ Enter

2 LOW FRQ TEST

TEST TONE • • • • • OFF

OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R

FRQ • • • • • • • • • • 88Hz

SET MENU

2 LOW FRQ TEST

TEST TONE • • • • • OFF

OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R

FRQ • • • • • • • • • 88Hz

Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub

item.

5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting

of the item.

6 Press u/d repeatedly until the current DSP

program appears or simply press one of the

DSP program group button to exit from the

SET MENU.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

TEST TONE • • • • • •ON

OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R

FRQ • • • • • • • • • 88Hz

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode

settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration. You must set the output mode

when you use a subwoofer.

Notes

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,

level adjustments in items 1B and 1D are possible, but those in

items 1A,1C and 1E are not affected.

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level

adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected.

■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker

mode)

By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

the unit can provide good dialog localization for many

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and

images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center

speaker depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire

range of the center channel signal is directed to the center

speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS

OUT”.

1A CENTER SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1A CENTER SP

LRG

SML

NONE

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you

adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust

the items again.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker

mode)

The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers

depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or

if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the

left and right rear speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers.

The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D

LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting

NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the

center channel signals are directed to the left and right

main speakers.

■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode)

The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending

on how you set this item.

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

Initial setting: LARGE

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire

range of the left and right main channel signal is directed

to the left and right main speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS

OUT”.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “1D LFE/BASS OUT”, the low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are

directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the

main speaker mode.

1A CENTER SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1B MAIN SP

LARGE

SMALL

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1B MAIN SP

LARGE

SMALL

SET MENU

■ 1D LFE/BASS OUT (bass out

mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

Initial setting: BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are

directed to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals

are directed to the main speakers.

BOTH

Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix

the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE

signals.

Note

• The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main,

center and rear channels are directed to the LFE channel when

you select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B and 1C.

1D LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR

MAIN

BOTH

1D LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR

MAIN

BOTH

■ 1E MAIN LEVEL (main level

mode)

Change this setting if you cannot match the output level

of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers

because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of

the main speakers.

Choices: Normal, –10 dB

Initial setting: Normal

Normal

Select this if you can match the output level of your effect

speakers with that of your main speakers when using the

test tone.

–10 dB

Select this if you cannot match the output level of your

effect speakers with that of your main speakers when

using the test tone.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the

subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your

configuration. Change the setting with the remote control

while sitting in the listening position.

1 Press j / i to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and

adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you

can hear the tone.

Notes

• Do not turn up the volume too high.

• If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in

the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections

are correct.

1E MAIN LEVEL

Normal

–10dB

1E MAIN LEVEL

Normal

–10dB

1D LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR

MAIN

BOTH

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

2 Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i

to select the speaker you want to compare

with the subwoofer.

If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will

not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will

not necessarily be output from the selected speakers.

The output mode of the test tone depends on the

settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU.

3 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to

select the frequency you want to use.

4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the

controls on the subwoofer so it matches that

of the speaker you are comparing it to.

■ About the test tone

The test tone is produced by the tone generator.

The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise

centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter.

You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through

250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps.

You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the

subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency

characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency

sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position,

speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other

conditions.

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the

left and right main speakers)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level

from the left and right main speakers.

Control range: 10 steps for L/R

Initial setting: 0

Press i to decrease the output level for the

left main speaker. Press j for the right main

speaker.

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone

tone control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you use your headphones.

Control range (dB): –6 to +3

Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic

equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches

that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.

Control range (dB): –6 to +6

Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band

1 Press d to select a higher frequency and u

to select a lower frequency.

2 Press j / i to adjust the level of that

frequency.

• You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this

item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the

foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the

video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the

speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains

at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes

as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone,

press TEST (see pages 22 and 23).

Digital generator

(wide band noise produced)

Noise

Freq.

Center freq. 35 Hz – 250 Hz

Band pass filter

SET MENU

6 INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input which

appears on the OSD or the front panel display.

1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT

l / h) to select the input you want to

change the name of.

2 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

3 Press u/d to select the character you want

to use and j / i to move to the next one.

• Press d to change the character in the following

order, or press u to go in the reverse order.

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #,

*, +, and so on.

• Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other

inputs.

Note

• You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs.

4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT

RENAME.

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to designate the input for the

COMPONENT jacks (A and B) and the DIGITAL

INPUT/OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8) to any sources you

want.

■ 7A [A] [B] (for the COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks)

Initial settings: [A] DVD

[B] D-TV/LD

■ 7B (1) (2) (for the OPTICAL

OUTPUT jacks)

Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE

(2) CD-R

■ 7C (3) to (6) (for the OPTICAL

INPUT jacks)

Initial settings: (3) CD

(4) CD-R

(5) DVD

(6) D-TV/LD

■ 7D (7) (8) (for the COAXIAL INPUT

jacks)

Initial settings: (7) CD

(8) CBL/SAT

Note

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

8 INPUT MODE (initial input

mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

on this unit (see page 26 for details about the input

mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

Initial setting: AUTO

AUTO

Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

LAST

Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last

input mode used for that source.

9 PARAM. INI (parameter

initialization)

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP

program within a DSP program group. When you

initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter

values within that group revert to their initial settings.

1 Press DSP.

2 Press the numeric button (DSP program

group button) on the remote control for the

DSP program you want to initialize.

All of the DSP programs within the selected program

group are initialized.

• The asterisk mark (*) next to a DSP program group number

indicates that you have changed the parameter values in one or

more DSP programs within that group.

Notes

• You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a

group separately.

• The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if

you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk

mark (*).

• When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 46),

you cannot initialize any program groups.

• Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot

automatically revert to the previous parameter settings.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

10 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital

set)

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes

Dolby Digital signals.

■ 10A LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a

Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-

frequency special effect sound which is only added to

certain scenes.

Control value (dB): –20 to 0

Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

■ 10B D-RANGE (dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range.

Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN

Initial setting: MAX for both SP (speaker) and HP

(headphones)

• Select MAX for feature films.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely

low volume level.

L-LEVEL BST

H-LEVEL CUT

0.0

1.0

MAX

11 DTS LFE LEVEL

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS

signals.

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS

signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special

effect sound which is only added to certain scenes.

Control range (dB): –10 to +10

Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

12 6.1/ES AUTO

Use this feature to switch the auto mode of the Dolby

Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder on or off.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: ON

Select this to allow this unit to automatically turn on the

Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder when a

signal with the appropriate identification is detected.

OFF

Select this if you want to turn on or off the Dolby Digital

Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder manually by pressing 6.1/

ES on the remote control.

Dialog

level

Input level

Output level

STD

Dialog

level

Input level

Output level

MIN

Dialog

level

Input level

Output level

Note

• When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because

some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the

minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or

STD.

SET MENU

13 SP DELAY TIME

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel

sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should

be the same distance from the listening position as the left

and right main speakers. However, in most home

situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the

main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center

speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to

the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the

same as the distance between the left and right main

speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay

time for the center speaker is especially important for

giving depth to the dialog.

Control range (ms): 0 to 5

14 DISPLAY SET

■ BLUE BACK > AUTO/OFF

You can set the OSD background to blue if the video

source is not being reproduced (or the power of the source

component is off).

■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)

This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the

OSD.

■ DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

15 MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other settings on this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

Notes

• When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use

the test tone.

• When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select

any other SET MENU items.

Center speaker image

• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers

about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS

Center speaker output

level

Right rear speaker output

level

Left rear speaker output

level

Subwoofer output level

• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to

be adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection

in the reverse order.)

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

• The control range for the center or left and right

rear speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB

to –20 dB.

Notes

• If the speaker output mode is set to NONE, the output level of

that speaker cannot be adjusted.

• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you

made with the test tone will be changed.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the output level of the effect speakers

you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so,

adjust the output level again.

You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker

(center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening

to a music source.

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

1 Set the selector dial to the

AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)

position.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to adjust.

Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker

changes and appears on the front panel display and

on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear,

left rear and subwoofer.

SLEEP TIMER

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY

TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

DIGITAL

4 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the

front panel display after the sleep timer has

been set.

The display then returns to the previous indication.

Canceling the Sleep Timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns

to the previous indication.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit

in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control

(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the

AC power cord from the AC outlet.

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DTS

MOVIE

THEATER

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

PRO

LOGIC

ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY

TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

DIGITAL

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The

sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer

also automatically turns off the external components

connected to AC OUTLET(S).

The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.

• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you

can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions

of the timer.

Setting the Sleep Timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Set the selector dial to a

position other than the TV

position.

3 Press SLEEP repeatedly

to set the amount of time

before this unit

automatically turns off.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

The remote control can operate this unit as well as other YAMAHA A/V components. To control the components from

other manufacturers (or some from YAMAHA), you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes.

This remote control also has a sophisticated feature: Learn. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the

remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with a infrared remote

control receiver. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment

room.

Notes

• For the operating distance of the remote contorol and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 8.

• For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 to 8.

• If the memory on the remote control becomes full, no further learning is possible, even if there are still some programmable buttons

available (see page 55).

Selector Dial

There are 9 positions that you can select to control connected components with this remote control. For example, if the

CD position is selected, the remote control is set in the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled by

the buttons on the remote control. When turning the selector dial, the position changes as follows:

Selector

dial

AMP/TUN

You can perform the basic operations of

this unit. See pages 6 and 7.

The code for a YAMAHA CD

player is factory-set.

CBL/SAT

A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled.

VCR

A VCR can be controlled.

A TV can be controlled.

TAPE/MD

The code for a YAMAHA tape deck is factory-

set. Be sure to set the proper code when

operating an MD recorder or CD recorder.

DVD/LD & DVD MENU

An LD player can be controlled in

the DVD/LD position. A DVD player

can be controlled in the DVD/LD and

DVD MENU positions. The code for

a YAMAHA DVD player is factory-

set. If the remote control does not

operate your YAMAHA DVD player,

you need to set the code number

“0048”.

DSP/TUN

This unit can be controlled and DSP

programs can be selected directly.

Note

• The general operational buttons on the remote control differ depending on the position of the selector dial. See the following pages

for details.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Commonly Used Buttons in Any

Position of the Selector Dial

Regardless of the position of the selector dial, you can

control this unit and your TV with the following buttons.

Note

• You have to set up the code for your TV in the TV position

before you can control the TV.

■ Controlling this unit

See pages 6 and 7.

1 STANDBY

2 POWER

3 VOLUME +/–

4 SLEEP

Note

• If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial

to the TV position, this button is used to set the sleep timer for

the TV.

5 MUTE

Note

• If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial

to the TV position, this button is used to mute the TV sound.

■ Controlling your TV

! TV POWER

@ TV INPUT

# TV VOLUME +/–

Controlling the Components

Connected to This Unit

The example below describes the procedure for

controlling a YAMAHA CD player.

1 Set the selector dial to the

CD position.

2 Turn on the power.

3 Press INPUT.

The indicator lights up for

about 3 second.

4 Press CD while the

indicator is lit.

5 Press p.

See page 51 for the CD player

operation buttons.

6 Adjust the volume.

If you set the remote control with the manufacturer

codes listed from page i at the end of this

manual, you can control other brands of components.

See “Setting the Manufacturer Codes” on page 54 for

details.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

A/B/C/D/E

Button Names and Functions in Each Position

■ TAPE/MD position (tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder)

Select the TAPE/MD position.

r Rec/Pause (tape/MD)

p Play

b DIR A (tape)

This button selects the playing direction of deck A.

Skip – (MD/CD-R)

w Rewind (tape)

Search (MD/CD-R)

Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R)

INDEX (CD-R)

+10 (MD/CD-R)

Deck A/B (tape)

This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette

tape deck.

DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)

e Pause (MD/CD-R)

a DIR B (tape)

This button selects the playing direction of deck B.

Skip + (MD/CD-R)

AV POWER

(Tape) This button turns on the tape deck that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer.

(MD) This button turns on the MD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer.

(CD-R) This button turns on the CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer.

■ CD position

Select the CD position.

DISC SKIP –/+

(for a CD player with CD changer)

p Play

b Skip –

w Search

Numeric buttons

INDEX

+10

DISPLAY

e Pause

YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop

a Skip +

s Stop

YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop

f Search

AV POWER

This button turns on the CD player that has a remote

control with a power button if you have set up the

code for another manufacturer.

y Pause/Stop function

• Press the button once to give

a pause in operation and press

once more to stop operation.

Notes

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. Refer to the operation instructions for your component.

You can program a remote control function to all buttons except DSP and INPUT. See “Programming a New Remote

Control Function” on page 55.

s Stop

f Fast forward (tape)

Search (MD/CD-R)

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

A/B/C/D/E

■ DVD/LD position

Select the DVD/LD position.

DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD)

p Play

b Skip – (DVD)

Skip/Chapter – (LD)

w Search

Numeric buttons

INDEX/Time (DVD)

Chapter/Time (LD)

+10

DISPLAY

e Pause

a Skip + (DVD)

Skip/Chapter + (LD)

s Stop

f Search

AV POWER

(DVD) This button turns on the YAMAHA DVD player if you have set up the code number “0048”. Also this button turns on the DVD player

that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer.

(LD) This button turns on the LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer.

■ DVD MENU position

Note

• DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.

Select the DVD MENU position.

DISC SKIP –/+

Return

Menu select

Menu left

TITLE

Numeric buttons

INDEX

+10

DISPLAY

Menu up

Menu right

Menu down

AV POWER

This button turns on the YAMAHA DVD player if you have set up the code number “0048”. Also this

button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the

code for another manufacturer.

Notes

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. Refer to the operation instructions for your component.

You can program a remote control function to all buttons except DSP and INPUT. See “Programming a New Remote

Control Function” on page 55.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

A/B/C/D/E

■ VCR position

Select the VCR

position.

VCR REC

Press this button twice

to start recording.

p Play

w Rewind

Numeric

buttons

Ch enter/Recall

_/_ _

CH –/+

DISPLAY

e Pause

s Stop

Fast forward

AV POWER

This button turns on a VCR that has a remote control with a power

button if you have set up the code for your VCR.

■ CBL/SAT position

Select the CBL/SAT

position.

CH –/+

Menu select

Menu left

Recall

Numeric buttons

Ch enter

_/_ _

DISPLAY/

Guide (SAT)

Menu up

Menu right

Menu down

AV POWER

This button turns on a cable TV/satellite tuner that has a remote

control with a power button if you have set up the code for your cable

TV/satellite tuner.

■ TV position

Note

• You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for it in

the VCR position.

Select the TV

position.

VCR REC

Press this button twice.

p VCR play

w VCR rewind

TV POWER

This button turns on a TV that

has a remote control with a

power button if you have set up

the code for your TV.

TV VOL +/–

TV INPUT

Numeric buttons

Ch enter/Recall

_/_ _

CH –/+

DISPLAY

e VCR pause

s VCR stop

VCR fast forward

VCR power

TV SLEEP

TV MUTE

Notes

• The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.

• Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. Refer to the operation instructions for your component.

You can program a remote control function to all buttons except DSP and INPUT. See “Programming a New Remote

Control Function” on page 55.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Setting the Manufacturer Code

You can set up the code for the manufacturer of your

component in each position of the selector dial.

1 Turn on your component to be used.

2 Set the selector dial to the

desired position for the

component (TAPE/MD, CD,

DVD/LD, etc.).

3 Press j / i at the same time for about

4 seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

4 Use the numeric buttons

to enter the four-digit

manufacturer code for the

component to be used.

Make sure that the

indicator flashes twice.

If the indicator does not flash

or flashes rapidly several

times, repeat step 3 and re-

enter the code.

5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) to

check if you have set up the code correctly.

If your component cannot be

controlled with the remote

control, try setting another

code for the same

manufacturer.

Notes

• You can set up only one code for one position.

• In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions:

Be sure to set the selector dial to the DVD/LD position before

entering the code for the DVD/LD player. The code set up in

the DVD/LD position is also simultaneously set up in the DVD

MENU position. You cannot set up the code for a DVD player

when the selector dial is set to the DVD MENU position.

• If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed

for the manufacturer, you can program functions from the other

remote control’s functions (see page 55 for details).

• If you have already programmed a remote control function to a

button, the function by programming (see page 55) takes

priority over the set up manufacturer code’s function.

■ To use a second (and third) VCR

You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/

SAT and DVD MENU positions if a cable TV/satellite

tuner or DVD player is not being used.

Note

• If you want to control a second (and third) VCR in the DVD

MENU position, you must set up the code for an LD player in

the DVD/LD position.

1 Turn on the VCR to be used.

2 Set the selector dial to the

CBL/SAT or DVD MENU

position.

3 Press j / i at the same time for about

4 seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

4 Use the numeric buttons

to enter the four-digit

code for the second (and

third) VCR. Make sure that

the indicator flashes

twice.

If the indicator does not flash

or flashes rapidly several

times, repeat step 3 and re-

enter the code.

5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) to

check if you have set up the code correctly.

If the VCR cannot be

controlled with the remote

control, try setting another

code for the same

manufacturer.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Programming a New Remote

Control Function (Learn Feature)

If you want to program functions not included in the basic

operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a

manufacturer code is not available, the following

procedure needs to be performed. You can program

functions to all buttons except DSP and INPUT in all

positions of the selector dial other than AMP/TUN and

DSP/TUN, so the buttons are programmable

independently for each position of the selector dial.

• You can program about 60 buttons.

Note

• This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn

most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you

may not be able to program some special signals or extremely

long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the

other remote control.)

1 Set the selector dial to the

desired position for the

component to be

programmed.

2 Place this remote control and the other

remote control about 10 to 40 mm (3/8” to

1-1/2”) apart on a flat surface so that their

infrared transmitters are aimed at each other.

10 to 40 mm (3/8” to 1-1/2”)

3 Press and hold e and p at the same time

for about 4 seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 4

and 5, the indicator flashes twice and the learning process is

canceled. If this happens, start over from step 3.

4 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

The indicator lights up.

Lights up

5 Press and hold the button on the other

remote control that has the function you

want to program into this remote control

until the indicator goes off.

Goes off

Notes

• If this remote control cannot receive the signals from other

remote control, the indicator flashes rapidly.

• When the memory is full, the indicator flashes twice and this

remote control cannot acquire any more functions. Clear

unnecessary programmed functions to allow this remote control

to acquire new functions.

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 5,

the indicator flashes twice. This indicates that the learning

process is complete and the remote control has exited from the

learning mode.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional

functions.

7 Press DSP or INPUT, or turn the selector dial

to exit from the learning mode.

The indicator flashes twice.

Notes

• Even if the batteries in the other remote control have enough

power to transmit signals for operation, they may not have

enough power to transmit signals to this remote control.

• When the remote controls are either too close together or too

far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control.

• Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays.

Memory back-up

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Returning to the Factory Setting

■ To return to the factory-set codes

and to clear the learned functions

in all positions

1 Press j / i at the same time for about

4 seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

2 Enter the code number “9990”.

Make sure that the indicator flashes twice.

■ To return to the factory-set codes

and to clear the learned functions

in each position

1 Set the selector dial to the

position for the

component to be returned

to the factory setting.

2 Press j / i at the same time for about

4 seconds.

The indicator flashes twice.

3 Enter the code number “0000”.

Make sure that the indicator flashes twice.

The following codes are factory set.

Selector dial

position

Component

Code

TV TV 0101

CBL/SAT Satellite tuner 0006

VCR VCR 0002

DVD/LD DVD player

0008 (YAMAHA DVD

player)

CD CD player

0005 (YAMAHA CD

player)

TAPE/MD Tape deck

0004 (YAMAHA Tape

deck)

AMP/TUN this unit 0003

DSP/TUN this unit 0013

We recommend that you write all the code numbers you

have set on the “Quick Reference Card”.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor (DSP). This processor allows you to

electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a

theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create outstanding audio sound field by selecting a suitable DSP

program (this will, of course, depend on what you are listening to) and making desired adjustments.

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

Note

• Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.

Hi-Fi DSP Programs

■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 5

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

No. Program (group) Sub-program Features

1 CONCERT HALL —

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections

from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great

deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage.

2 CHURCH — This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high

dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while

the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.

3 JAZZ CLUB —

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York

jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field

offering a real and vibrant sound.

4 ROCK CONCERT —

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was

recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left

of the hall.

5 ENTERTAINMENT Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a

big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a

high-energy, “immediate” sound.

5ch Stereo

Note

• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker.

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field

suitable for background music at parties.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

No.

MOVIE

THEATER 1

Analog,

PCM, Dolby

Digital in

2-channel

DGTL Spectacle *

Spectacle 6.1 *

DTS Spectacle *

Spectacle ES *

This program creates the extremely wide sound

field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely

reproduces the source sound in detail, making

both the video and the sound field incredibly real.

This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded

with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

(especially large-scale movie productions).

Sci-Fi 70 mm Sci-Fi

Analog,

PCM, Dolby

Digital in

2-channel

DGTL Sci-Fi *

Sci-Fi 6.1 *

DTS Sci-Fi *

Sci-Fi ES *

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound

effects in the latest sound form of science fiction

films, thus creating a broad and expansive

cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy

science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field

that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and

DTS-encoded software employing the most

advanced techniques.

Program

(group)

Sub-program

Input source Features

Spectacle 70 mm Spectacle

Dolby

Digital

DTS

Dolby

Digital

DTS

CINEMA DSP Programs

■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 5 to 7

■ For movie programs: Nos. 8 to 10

No. Program (group) Sub-program Features

5 ENTERTAINMENT Game

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

7 MONO MOVIE —

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old

movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth

by using only the presence sound field.

6 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field

employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you

can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music

programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the

commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the

atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the

rear is properly restrained.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

9 MOVIE

THEATER 2

Analog,

PCM, Dolby

Digital in

2-channel

DGTL Adventure *

Adventure 6.1 *

DTS Adventure *

Adventure ES *

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing

the sound design of the newest 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field

is made to be similar to that of the newest movie

theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field

itself are restrained as much as possible.

General 70 mm General Analog,

PCM, Dolby

Digital in

2-channel

DGTL General *

General 6.1 *

DTS General *

General ES *

This program is for reproducing sounds from

70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and

is characterized by a soft and extensive sound

field. The presence sound field is relatively

narrow. It spatially spreads all around and

toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of

conversations without losing clarity. For the

surround sound field, the harmony of music or

chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the

rear of the sound field.

Adventure 70 mm Adventure

Dolby

Digital

DTS

Dolby

Digital

DTS

No.

Program

(group)

Sub-program

Input source

Features

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

No.

q/DTS

SURROUND

Normal/

Matrix

6.1/ES

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

*1 The Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is off.

*2 The Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is on. The “ c ” indicator lights up on the front panel display.

• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically

switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.

• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when “12 6.1/ES AUTO” on the SET MENU is set to ON, the

Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will be selected.

• 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to turn the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder on or off during Dolby Digital 5.1-

channel source or DTS 5.1-channel source playback.

Notes

• The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “Normal” of the q/DTS SURROUND program.

• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker.

• The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 5 (Game)

and 6 to 9.

Program

(group)

10 PRO LOGIC/Normal

DOLBY DIGITAL/

Normal *

DOLBY DIGITAL/

Matrix 6.1 *

DTS DIGITAL SUR./

Normal *

DTS DIGITAL SUR./

ES *

The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds

and sound effects from sources.

The highly efficient decoding process improves

crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound

positioning smoother and more precise.

In this program, the digital sound field processor is

not turned on.

Enhanced PRO LOGIC/Enhanced Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

DOLBY DIGITAL/

Enhanced *

DOLBY DIGITAL/

Enhanced 6.1 *

DTS DIGITAL SUR./

Enhanced *

DTS DIGITAL SUR./

Enhanced ES *

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround

speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby

Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or

DTS decoding and digital sound field processing

create precise effects without altering the original

sound orientation.

The surround effects produced by this sound field

wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to

the left and right, and toward the screen.

Sub-program

Input source Features

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

MOVIE THEATER Programs

Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround

matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder.

The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to

be lost in the encoding and decoding processes.

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without

using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound

localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality

sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a

dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or

DTS technology.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect

These programs express an immense sound field and a

large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound

from the main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a

Dolby Stereo theater.

Presence DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Surround DSP

sound field

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing

on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,

left surround and right surround channels. This processing

enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field

and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-

equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear

separation of all channels.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

What is a sound field?

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections

enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument,

there are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or

a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as

shown in the diagram on page 64 for any particular

environment, and provide vital information to our ears.

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of

a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

Sound Field Program Parameters

DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine

the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from

you to the performer, etc. In each program, these

parameters are set with values precisely calculated by

YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.

It is recommended to use DSP programs without

changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also

allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with

one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those

parameters.

Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you

to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment

to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters

correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create

the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or

other listening environment. The size of the room, for

example, affects the length of time between the early

reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in

many of the DSP programs alters the timing between

these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room”

you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of

the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a

significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb

sound, for example, cause the reflections and

reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly

reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a

longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters

allow you to control these and many other factors that

contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to

essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc.

provided to create custom-tailored listening environments

that ideally match your mood and music.

See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on

pages 64 to 67.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

Changing Parameter Settings

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set

parameters. Although you do not have to change the

initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

Adjustments should be made with the remote control.

• We recommend that you edit the parameter while using a video

monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the

front panel display.

1 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN (or

AMP/TUN) position.

2 Turn on the video monitor

and press ON SCREEN

repeatedly to select the

full display mode.

3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.

Program No. Program name (group)

Cursor

Parameters

Example of the ROCK CONCERT

4 Press u/d to select the

parameter.

5 Press j / i to change the

parameter value.

• When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory-

set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name

on the video monitor.

6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to

change other program parameters.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter value you edited will

return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter

value again.

Resetting a Parameter to the

Factory-set Value

■ To reset some of the parameters

to the factory-set values

Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and

hold j or i until the value temporarily stops at the

factory-set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter

name disappears on the video monitor.

■ To reset all of the parameters to

the factory-set values

Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of

the parameter values of all DSP programs within the

selected group to the factory-set values (see page 44).

This operation resets all of the parameter values of all

DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values.

Notes

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,

press u/d.

• You cannot change parameter values when “15 MEMORY

GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to

change the parameter values, set “15 MEMORY GUARD” to

OFF (see page 46).

P04 ROCK CONCERT

INIT.DLY

15ms

REV.TIME

LIVENESS

REV.DELAY

REV.LEVEL

100ms

1.6s

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room.

Note

• Not all of the following parameters can be found in every program.

■ INIT.DLY (initial delay)

(P.INIT.DLY — for the presence sound field)

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the sound source by adjusting the delay between the

direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Control range: 1 – 99 msec

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther

the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large

room, set it to a large value.

INT. DLY INT. DLY INT. DLY

Level

Time

Level

Sound source

Early

reflections

Time

Level

Time

Sound source

Reflection surface

Small value = 1 ms

Large value = 99 ms

■ ROOM SIZE

(P.ROOM SIZE — for the presence sound field)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the

surround sound field becomes.

Control range: 0.1 – 2.0

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Level

Time

Level

Time

Sound source

Early reflections

Level

Time

Sound source

First reflection

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGSOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

■ LIVENESS

Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the

early reflections decay.

Control range: 0 – 10

Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as “dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.” The

“LIVENESS” parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the

room.

Level

Time

Dead

Level

Sound source

Time

Level

Time

Live

Sound source

Small reflected sound

Small value = 0

Large reflected sound

Large value = 10

■ S.DELAY (surround delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound

field.

Control range: 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.)

■ S.INIT.DLY (surround initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side

of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear

channels are used.

Control range: 1 – 49 msec

■ S.ROOM SIZE (surround room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

Control range: 0.1 – 2.0

■ S.LIVENESS (surround liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

Control range: 0 – 10

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

■ RC.INIT.DLY (rear center initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center

sound field.

Control range: 1 – 49 msec

■ RC.ROOM SIZE (rear center room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field.

Control range: 0.1 – 2.0

■ RC.LIVENESS (rear center liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field.

Control range: 0 – 10

■ REV.TIME (reverberation time)

Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to

decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an

extremely wide range.

Control range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec

Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments and a shorter time

for “live” sources and listening room environments.

60 dB

REV. TIME REV. TIME REV. TIME

60 dB 60 dB

Level

Time

Level

Time

Sound source

Early reflections

Level

Time

Short reverberations

Long reverberations

Small value = 1.0 s

Large value = 5.0 s

Reverberations

Sound source

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGSOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

■ REV.DELAY (reverberation delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning

of the reverberation sound.

Control range: 0 – 250 msec

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in the larger acoustic environment.

REV. LEVEL

60 dB

(dB)

REV.

DELAY

REV TIME

Level

Sound source

Reverberation

Time

■ REV.LEVEL (reverberation level)

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Control range: 0 – 100%

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Level

Sound source

Time

■ CT.DELAY (center delay)

■ LS.DELAY (left surround delay)

■ RS.DELAY (right surround delay)

Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 – 50 msec

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact

the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/ON

(or POWER) is

pressed, or enters in

the standby mode

soon after the power

has been turned on.

The power cord is not connected or the plug

is not completely inserted.

Firmly connect the power cord.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on

the rear panel is not fully set to the left or

right position.

Set the switch fully to the left or right position

when the unit is in the standby mode.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on

this unit and on all speakers are secure and

that the wire for each connection does not

touch anything other than its respective

connection.

No sound and/or no

picture.

Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

An appropriate input source has not been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with

INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input

selector buttons).

The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The main speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A

and/or B.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this

unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

No picture. There is no S-video connection between this

unit and the video monitor, although S-

video signals are being input to this unit.

Connect the monitor’s S-video input jack to

this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

is set to the appropriate position and then turn

the unit back on.

Only the speaker on

one side can be heard.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE”

on the SET MENU.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

16, 17

12 – 15

16, 17

APPENDIX

The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again.

Incorrect cable connections.

Check the speaker wires are not touching

each other and then turn the unit back on.

—

14, 15

16, 17

12 – 17

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this

unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Digital signals other than PCM audio,

Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this

unit cannot reproduce are being input to

this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc.

Play a source whose signals this unit can

reproduce.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

No sound from the

effect speakers.

The sound effect is off.

Press EFFECT to turn it on.

A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

decoding DSP program is being used with

material not encoded with Dolby Surround,

Dolby Digital or DTS.

Select another DSP program.

A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being

input to this unit.

No sound from the

center speaker.

The output level of the center speaker is set

to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is

set to NONE.

Select the appropriate mode for your center

speaker.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 5)

has been selected.

Select another DSP program.

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal does not have a center

channel signal.

No sound from the

rear speakers.

The output level of the rear speakers is set

to minimum.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers.

A monaural source is being played with the

program 10.

Select another DSP program.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

“1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU

is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel

source is being played.

Select BOTH.

The source does not contain low bass

signals (90 Hz and below).

“1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU

is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal is being played.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

Poor bass

reproduction.

“1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU

is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system

does not include a subwoofer.

Select MAIN.

The output mode for each speaker (main,

center or rear) on the SET MENU does not

match your speaker configuration.

Select the appropriate output mode for each

speaker based on the size of the speakers in

your configuration.

57 – 60

—

57 – 60

—

40, 41

12 – 15

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the

problem persists, the cables may be

defective.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cord of your

turntable to the GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while playing a

record.

The record is being played on a

turntable with an MC cartridge.

The turntable should be connected to the unit

through an MC-head amplifier.

12, 13

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the REC OUT

jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect by

a recording component.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

The sound is degraded

when listening with

headphones

connected to a tape

deck or CD player that

is connected to this

unit.

There is noise

interference from

digital or high-

frequency equipment,

or the unit.

The unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move the unit further away from such

equipment.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen

by an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or by

a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the

outlet and then plug it in again after about

30 seconds.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

of this unit.

A source component is only connected to the

analog input jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the digital

input jacks of this unit.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

“15 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU

is set to ON.

Select OFF.

Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected

correctly.

This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit.

12 – 15

—

16, 17

—

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

FM stereo

reception is noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts

may cause this problem when the

transmitter is too far away or the antenna

input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion,

and clear reception

cannot be obtained

even with a good

FM antenna.

There is multipath interference.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in

with the automatic

tuning method.

The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Previously preset

stations can no

longer be tuned in.

The unit has been disconnected for a long

period.

Re-store the stations.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and

orient it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

There are

continuous

crackling and

hissing noises.

Noises result from lightning, fluorescent

lamps, motors, thermostats and other

electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

There are buzzing

and whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.

30, 31

—

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle.

The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition the unit.

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones.

The unit or other

component cannot be

controlled.

The component to be controlled has not been

selected.

Set the selector dial to the appropriate position,

corresponding to the component to be

controlled.

The remote control cannot control system

components.

The manufacturer code has not been set up

properly.

Enter the code again.

Try setting another code for the same

manufacturer.

Depending on the manufacturer or the

model, some components cannot be

controlled with this unit’s remote control

even though the code has been set up

properly.

Program functions from the other remote

control’s function into this remote control.

The remote control

does not “learn” new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper

distance.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible with

this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without

deleting unnecessary functions.

—

After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if

you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode,

disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms ............................... 100 W

1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms ................................................ 105 W

• DIN Standard Output Power

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms .................................................. 140 W

• IEC Output Power

1 kHz, 0.04%, 8 ohms ......................................................... 105 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 ohms ................................................... 125/160/195/230 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms .............................................. 80 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 ohms, Main L/R .......................... 0.04%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted) ........................ 81 dB

CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kohms terminated) to Main L/R .................. 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

BASS EXTENSION ................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz

• Phones Output ..................................................... 150 mV/100 ohms

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc .............................................................. 150 mV/47 kohms

PHONO ............................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kohms

6CH INPUT .............................................. 150 mV/40 – 47 kohms

• Output Level

REC OUT ........................................................ 150 mV/0.9 kohms

PRE OUT ............................................................ 2.6 V/1.2 kohms

SUBWOOFER .................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ...................................................................... PAL

• Composite Video Signal Level ................................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

• S-Video Signal Level

Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

C .................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms

• Component Video Signal Level

Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

, P

....................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range .................................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)

Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB

• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range ......................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply ......................................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz

• Power Consumption .................................................. approx. 300 W

Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.2 W

• AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum)

[Europe model] ..................................................... 2 (SWITCHED)

[U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (SWITCHED)

• Dimension (W x H x D)

............................ 435 x 171 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17”)

• Weight ......................................................................... 15 kg (33 lbs)

• Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control

....................................................................................... Batteries

......................................................................... AM loop antenna

...................................................................... Indoor FM antenna

................ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only)

................................................................. Quick Reference Card

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES

LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT

VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES

LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER

ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE

LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES

LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT

ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911,

1021, 1081

AIKO 0891

AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231,

1191, 1351, 1591,

1641, 1791, 1891,

1981

AKURA 1331

ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361

ALBIRAL 1971

AMSTRAD 1301, 1511

ANAM 1171

ARC EN CIEL 0571

ARCAM 0571, 0761

ARISTONA 0751

ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641

ASA 0411, 0451, 0521,

0781, 0871, 1021,

1081, 1421, 2051,

2091, 2151, 2551

ASTRA 1511

ATANTIC 0761

ATLANTIC 0761

ATORI 1511

AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511

AUSIND 0491, 1411

AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481,

0491, 0601, 0781,

0951, 1051, 1081,

1391, 1421

BAIRD 1101, 1351

BANG & OLUFSEN 1081

BASIC LINE 1321, 1331

BAUER 1451

BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121,

0131, 0221, 1561

BEKO 2491, 2501

BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241,

0251, 0471, 0741,

2201, 2211, 2221,

2231, 2241, 2261,

2571, 2581

BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731,

0901, 1821

BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081

BRITANNIA 0761

BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021,

1081

BSR 0391, 0691, 1621,

1901, 1981

BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331,

1641, 1741, 2131,

2151

BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611

CANDLE 0791

CENTURY 1021, 1081

CGE 0491, 0811, 0981,

1401, 1531, 1611,

1621, 1981, 2201,

2251, 2271

CITIZEN 0791

CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971

CLATRONIC 1181, 1331

CONCERTO 0791

CONDOR 0761

CONTEC 0151, 1171

CONTINENTAL EDISON

0571, 0651, 0901

CRAIG 1171

CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021,

1081, 1401, 1981,

2201, 2251, 2271

CROWN 2541

CTC CLATRONIC 0261

CXC 1171

DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511,

2611

DANSAI 0101

DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601,

0971, 1101, 1691

DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601,

1101, 1681

DEGRAAF 0451, 1351

DIXI 0991, 1511

DOMEOS 0101

DORIC 1031

DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611,

1641, 2101

DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621,

2111

DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781,

1021, 1081, 1981,

2121, 2151

DYNATRON 0101

ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031

ELECTRO TECH 1511

ELEKTRONSKA 0771

ELMAN 0261, 1621

ELTA 1511

EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081,

1121, 1171, 1261,

1301

ERRES 0101

ETRON 1981

EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601,

0771, 1091, 1621,

2001

FENNER 0101, 1511

FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551,

0651, 0781, 0861,

0881, 1131, 1181,

1361, 1461, 1971,

1991, 2281, 2311,

2341

FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281

FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591,

1931, 2281

FILMNET 1141

FINLANDIA 0451, 2321

FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491,

0521, 0781, 0811,

0871, 1081, 1411,

1421, 1981, 2051,

2091, 2121, 2151,

2551

FIRST LINE 1981

FISHER 0021, 0091, 0141,

0511, 0601, 0801,

0821, 0981, 1021,

1081, 1981, 2091

FORGESTONE 2281

FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761,

1081, 1451, 1541,

1981

FORMENTI-PHOENIX

0021, 0431, 0451,

0591, 1411

FORTRESS 1081

FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981

FUJITSU 1261

FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171,

1181, 1261

FUTURETECH 1171

GBC 0021, 0141, 1321,

1511, 1621, 1981

GEC 0451, 1101, 1281,

2321

GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581,

0601, 1101, 1281,

1561

GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451,

1321, 1511, 1621,

1981

GENERAL TECHNIC2681

GENEXXA 0451, 1331

GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761,

0791, 1371, 1491,

1511, 1561, 1621,

1641

GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371,

1641, 2301

GORENJE 0981, 1061

GRAETZ 0451

GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491,

0581, 0601, 1101,

1111, 1351, 1981,

2321

GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141,

0451, 0491,

0581, 0601,

1031, 1311,

1521, 1561,

1641

GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471,

0491, 0711, 0741,

1381, 2021, 2041,

2141, 2151

HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141,

0431, 0591, 1561

HANTAREX 0581

HEMMERMANN 0061

HIFIVOX 0331, 0571

HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451,

1261, 1351, 1511,

1641, 1981, 2011

HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031,

0081, 0141, 0291,

0331, 0341, 0451,

0601, 0631, 0701,

1281, 1561, 1601,

1821, 1831, 1841,

1861, 1871, 1881,

1891, 1941, 1981,

2051, 2321, 2341

HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511,

1621

IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811,

0981, 1401, 1611,

1621, 2201, 2251,

2271

INGERSOL 1511

INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841,

1101, 1331, 1371,

1511, 2011

INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2711, 2721,

2761, 2771, 2781

INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061,

0121, 0181, 0451,

0491, 1081, 1641,

1791, 1821, 1981,

2231

IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331,

1371, 1411, 1511,

2011

ISUKAI 1331

ITT 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431

ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431

JVC 0071, 0721, 1441,

1581, 1591, 1741,

1791

KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331

KAMOSONIC 0601

KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841,

1091, 1321, 1511,

1561, 2051

KAWASHO 0761

KENDO 0261

KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951,

1981

KONKA 2701

KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021,

1081, 1541

08V800RDS_code(GB) 8/29/0, 10:00 AM1

KTV 0601, 1171

LENOIR 0601, 1511

LEYEO 1181

LIFETEC 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2671, 2681,

2691, 2711, 2761,

2771, 2781

LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581,

0611, 1081

LOGIC 1691, 2281

LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281

LOWEWE 0831

LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901

LUXMAN 0791

LUXMAN STEREO TUNER

0791

LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181,

0341, 0421, 0451,

0461, 0491, 0601,

0671, 1351, 1371,

1561, 1601, 1911,

1921, 1981

LYCO 1181

MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261,

0581, 0641, 0771,

1021, 1081, 1621,

1981

MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581,

0591, 0641, 0761,

1091, 2001

MANESTH 0101

MARANTZ 0101

MARELLI 1081

MARK 0101

MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601,

0691, 1101, 1151,

1241, 1271, 1301,

1511, 1561, 1681,

1691

MAXIMAL 0071, 1981

MCMICHAEL 1281

MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2671, 2681,

2691, 2711, 2721,

2761, 2771, 2781

MEMOREX 1511

METZ 0231, 0741, 1001,

1041, 1081, 1481,

2071, 2081

MGA 1231

MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641,

2651, 2711, 2761,

2771, 2781

MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491,

1381, 2141, 2151

MISTRAL 2281

MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231,

0661, 1191, 1201,

1231, 1671, 1691,

1741

MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581,

0591, 0761, 0771,

1371, 1431, 2031

MTC 0791

MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601,

0641, 0981, 1321,

1511

MURPHY 0451, 2091

MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031

N.E.I. 0101, 0961

NAD 1341

NEC 0141, 1711, 1721,

1731

NECKERMANN 0451, 0601,

0981, 1081,

1561, 1931,

1981, 2211,

2231, 2241

NEDIATOR 0101

NICAMAGIC 0761

NIKKAI 1101, 1331, 1641,

1701, 2011

NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591,

0641, 1381, 1411

NOGAMATIC 0571

NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431, 2461, 2791

NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331,

0451, 0531, 0541,

0571, 1051, 1131,

1591, 1791, 1811,

1821, 1891, 1941,

2631

OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981

OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321,

0441, 1661

ONCEAS 0601

ONWA 1171

ORION 0061, 0391, 0691,

0851, 1211, 1241,

1251, 1301, 1481,

1511, 1681, 1691,

1981, 2371, 2421

OSAKA 2011

OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011

OSUME 0151

OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121,

0141, 0221,

0601, 1561,

1741, 1981

PAEL 0591, 1411

PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211,

0451, 0701, 1311,

1751, 1961, 2561,

2741

PANORAMIC 2351

PATHE MARCONI 0571

PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591,

1621, 1661,

1971

PAUSA 1511

PAUZA 1511

PERDIO 0891, 1101

PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811,

0981, 1021, 1081,

1401, 1611, 1621,

1751, 2201, 2251,

2271, 2451, 2471

PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591,

0621, 0681, 0751,

0761, 1021, 1081,

1281, 2031, 2281,

2291, 2431, 2441,

2511, 2731

PHOENIX 1081

PHONOLA 0751, 1081

PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341,

1821

PRANDONI-PRINCE 0411, 0451,

0491, 0581,

1411

PRANDONI-PROMCE

0451, 0491, 0581

PRIMA 0451

PROFEX 1981

PROTECH 0641, 1181, 1981

QUELLE 0041, 0061, 0121,

0221, 0231, 0391,

0491, 0521, 0601,

0781, 1371, 1381,

1411, 1421, 1641,

1681, 2051, 2091,

2141, 2151, 2201,

2211, 2231, 2241,

2251, 2271, 2551,

2571, 2581

REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451,

0661, 0771,

1081

RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091

RADIOLA 2291

RANK 0481, 2151

RBM 2131, 2151

RBM (UK) 0481

REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641,

1981, 2331

REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081,

1031

REX 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

RFT 0991, 2511

ROADSTAR 1321, 1511

ROTEL 0151

SABA 0291, 0331, 0421,

0451, 0531, 0541,

0571, 0581, 0651,

0731, 0931, 1021,

1071, 1081, 1131,

1791, 1811, 1821,

1891, 1941, 2631

SACCS 1971

SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161,

1241, 1301, 1511,

1671, 1681, 1691

SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061,

0071, 0341, 0451,

0671, 1291, 1351,

1521, 1561, 1601,

1641, 1911, 1921,

1931, 1981, 2321

SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581,

0641, 1091, 1371,

1411, 2001

SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841,

0981, 1101, 1181,

1371, 1511, 2011

SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401,

0601, 0801, 0821,

0981, 1021, 1101,

1111, 1291, 1351,

1691, 1741, 2051,

2091, 2551

SBR 0681, 0751, 1281,

2281

SCHAUB LORENZ 0451

SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091,

0451, 0511, 0591,

0601, 0751, 1321,

1361, 1621, 1641,

2101, 2111, 2291

SCOTT 1171, 1261

SEG 0261, 0601, 0821,

0991

SEI 0641, 0691, 1081,

1301, 1481, 1981

SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

SENTRA 1601

SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191,

1761, 1781

SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581,

0641, 1021, 1081,

1981

SICATEL 1971

SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231,

0451, 0741, 2011,

2201, 2211, 2221,

2231, 2241, 2261,

2571, 2581

SILVER 1181

SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021,

1081

SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101,

0261, 0391, 0641,

0691, 0851, 0941,

1021, 1081, 1241,

1301, 1321, 1481,

1631, 1981

SKANTIC 0451

SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011

SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511

SONY 0141, 0171, 1121,

1681, 1691, 2751

SOUNDESIGN 1171

SSS 1171

STERN 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

SUNKAI 0691

SUPRA 0791

TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611,

1021, 1421, 1771,

1791, 2081

TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331,

1531

TASHIKO 0141

TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601,

0971, 1101, 1681,

1691

TCM 2621, 2641, 2711,

2761, 2771, 2781

TECHNICS 1311

TECHWOOD 0791

TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261

TELE 1141

TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731,

1821

TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311,

0551, 0731, 1131,

1471, 1591, 1791,

1801, 1811, 1821,

1991, 2161, 2171,

2181, 2191, 2201,

2251, 2271, 2521,

2631

TELETECH 1511

TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401,

2411

TENSAI 1331, 2091

TEXET 0601

THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531,

0571, 0631, 0651,

0731, 0901, 1241,

1571, 1591, 1791,

1811, 1821, 1891,

1941, 2531

THORN 0741, 0861, 2091,

2251, 2271, 2281

08V800RDS_code(GB) 8/29/0, 10:00 AM2

iii

THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371,

0551, 0651,

0781, 0861,

0881, 1131,

1181, 1361,

1461, 1971,

1991, 2281

TMK 0141, 0791, 1471

TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481,

1221, 1271, 1701,

1741, 1851, 2151,

2801, 2811

TRANS CONTINENS

0451

TRISTAR 2281

TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121

UHER 0431, 0451, 0481,

0491, 0511, 1311,

1541

ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591,

1021, 1081, 1981

UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051

UNIVOX 1971

VEGAVOX 0811

VEXA 0101, 1511

VICTOR 1441, 1591

VIDEOTON 2481

VORTEC 0101, 0651

VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491,

1021, 1081

WALTHAM 0451

WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241

WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261,

0591, 0641, 0761,

1091, 1971, 1981,

2001

WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981

WEGA COLOR 1021

WELTBLICK 0101

WESTON 1621

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0101, 0261, 0431,

0591, 0761, 1401,

1541

YOKO 0601, 1511

ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

ZOPPAS 0451

CABLE TV

CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476

CLYDE CABLEVISION

1426

FILMNET 1396, 1436

FRANCE TELECOM 1386

GEC 1426

JERROLD 1416

MOVIE TIME 1466

NSC 1466

PHILIPS 1386

PIONEER 0006

SAMSUNG 1496

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

1486, 1506

STARCOM 1416

STS 1466

TANDBERG 1366

TELE 1436

TELE +1 1436

TELESERVICE 1406, 1476

TUDI 1376

UNITED CABLE 1416

ZENITH 1406

SATELLITE TUNER

AKAI 1276

ALBA 0826, 1276

AMSTRAD 0166, 0796, 1016,

1026, 1296

ANKARO 0476

AST 0406

ASTRA 0126

BARCOM 0476

BLAUPUNKT 0966

BMC SATELLITE 0106

BRITISH TELECOM 1276

BUSH 0826

BUSH (UK) 0956

CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276

CANAL PLUS (FRANCE)

1536

CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006

COLUMBUS 0616

CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426

DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866

DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476

DRAKE 1516

ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606,

0626, 0666, 0926,

0996, 1046, 1056,

1066, 1106

ELTA 1286

ELTA SAT 0146

EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246

FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186,

0296, 0846, 0956,

1306

FINLUX 0976

FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776

FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636,

1056

GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336

GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956,

0966

HIGH PERFORMANCE

0916

HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966

HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706,

0946

ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886

ITT 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156

ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156

JEEMON 0146

JERROLD 0846, 0986

JOHANSSON 0246

JVC 1276

KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276,

0366

KOSMOS 0266

KYOSTAR 1036, 1086

LENG 0246

LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356

LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446,

0466, 0506, 1156

MACAB 0356

MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256,

0956

MEDION 1326, 1346

METZ 0966

MICROMAXX 1326, 1346

MITSUBISHI 0966

MORGANS 0596

MURATTO 0406

NEC 0286, 0316, 0766,

0786, 0836

NETWORK 0046

NIKKO 1136, 1146

NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156, 1166,

1336

NORSAT 0786

OTTO VERSAND 0966

PACE 0046, 0176, 0296,

0936, 0956, 1306,

1566, 1576

PACE MSS 0946

PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK)

1526

PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706

PALSAT 0396

PALTEC 0706

PANASONIC 0806, 1306

PANSAT 1076

PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476,

0956, 1126, 1186,

1196, 1206, 1216,

1306, 1316

PROSAT 1176

PTT TELECOM 0306, 0896

QUELLE 0966

RADIX 1056

REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786

RFT 1186, 1196, 1206,

1216

SAGEM 1256, 1546

SAKURA 0566, 0816

SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136,

0446, 0456, 0486,

0496, 0576

SAMSUNG 0746, 0756

SAT 0406

SATCOM 0896

SATECO 0646

SECTOR 1266

SEDEA 1096

SENTRA 0416

SIEMENS 0896, 0966

SINTRACK 0906

SKYLAB 0476

SKYSCAN 0876

SONY 0736, 0946

STELLA 0306

STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036,

1086

STV 0636

TANDBERG 1116

TANDY 0916

TANTEC 0616

TATUNG 0516, 0546

TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526,

0556, 1056

TELECOM 0306

TELEMAX 0586

THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076,

0176, 0186,

0956

TOSHIBA 0946

TPS (FRANCE) 1546

TRIAD 0406

UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676,

0716, 0726

US ELECTRONICS 0886

VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076

VTECH 0436

WINERSAT 0246

WISI 0056, 0356, 0376,

0386, 0406, 0656,

1056, 1156

WOLSEY 0916

XCOM MULTIMEDIA 1556

XSAT (FRANCE) 1556

ZEHNDER 0266, 0406

ZENDER 0406

VCR

AIWA 0042, 0352, 0432

AKAI 0042, 0422, 0492,

0582, 0612, 0642,

0652, 0762, 0912

ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282,

0332, 0342, 0972

AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452

ANITECH 0002

ANITSCH 1002

ASA 0012, 0052

AUDIOSONIC 0002

BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492

BANG & OLUFSEN 0042

BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812

BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252,

0462, 0672, 0992

BRIONVEGA 0032

BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332,

0342, 0512, 0972

BUSH (UK) 0812

CAPEHART 0112

CGE 0042, 0432, 0762

CRAIG 0072, 0482

CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622

DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622

DANSAI 0012

DAYTRON 0112

DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432,

0942

DECCA (UK) 0052

DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432,

0532, 0602

DIXI 0442

DUAL 0042, 0632

DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532

DYNATECH 0432

DYNATRON 0012

ELBE 0122

ELIN 0072

EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202,

0432, 0512, 0522

ERRES 0012

FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722,

0852, 0902, 1012,

1022, 1082

FIDELITY 0432

FINLANDIA 0052, 0532

FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052,

0082, 0262, 0382,

0432, 0462, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0602,

0912

FIRST LINE 0002, 0912

FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532,

0542, 0572, 0592

FORMENTI-PHOENIX

0012, 0052

FRONTECH 0112

FUNAI 0432

GBC 0002

GEC (UK) 0022, 0052

GELOSO 0002

GENERAL TECHNIC1172

GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812,

0952

GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282,

0432, 0502

GOODMANS (UK) 0002

GRAETZ 0022, 0042

GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532,

0572

08V800RDS_code(GB) 8/29/0, 10:00 AM3

GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092,

0462, 0602,

0812, 0822

GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092,

0232, 0252, 0262,

0752, 0802

HANSEATIC 0052, 0812

HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922

HCM 0002

HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412,

0442, 0522

HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292,

0432, 0602, 0662,

0812, 1022

IMPERIAL 0072, 0432

INGERSOL 0442

INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072

INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172

INTERFUNK 0022, 0052

IRRADIO 0002, 0012

ITT 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762

ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762

JENSEN 0042

JVC 0042, 0102, 0142,

0272, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0902

KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812

KENDO 0492

KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572

LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172

LLOYD 0432

LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152

LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442

LUMA 0162

LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812

M ELECTRONIC 0432

MAGNADYNE 0052

MAGNASONIC 0572

MANESTH 0012

MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092,

0122, 0502

MARK 0012

MARTA 0012

MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512,

0522, 0812, 0972

MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172

MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432,

0482, 0532, 0572

METZ 0062, 0092, 0932

MGA 0912

MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172

MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252

MINOLTA 0172, 0602

MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142,

0912, 0922

MTC 0072, 0432

MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062,

0282, 0432

MURPHY 0432

N.E.I. 0012, 0052

NATIONAL 0462

NEC 0042, 0122, 0142

NECKERMANN 0032, 0042,

0052, 0072,

0092, 0202,

0522, 0572,

0762, 0812

NIKKAI 0112

NOBLIKO 0092

NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762,

1152

NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142,

0192, 0222, 0242,

0392, 0402, 0632,

0732, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0792, 0832,

0842, 0872

OLYMPUS 0462

OPTONICA 0132, 0502

ORION 0162, 0202, 0312,

0442, 0512, 0522,

0982

OSAKA 0432

OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432

OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062,

0812

PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462,

0672, 0992, 1092,

1102, 1182

PENTAX 0172, 0602

PERDIO 0432

PHILCO 1062

PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092,

0152, 0182, 0362,

0372, 0382, 0472,

0502, 1072

PHONOLA 0052, 0152

PILOT 0012

PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372,

0472

PORTLAND 0112

PROLINE 0432

PYE 0052, 0152

QUARTZ 0572

QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042,

0052, 0062, 0072,

0092, 0202, 0462,

0522, 0942

RADIONETTE 0022

REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132,

0432, 0482, 0502,

0532, 0572

RET 1072

REX 0042, 0742, 0782

RICOH 0952

SABA 0042, 0142, 0192,

0222, 0242, 0392,

0632, 0732, 0742,

0762, 0772, 0782,

0792, 0872

SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292,

0442, 0512, 0522,

0972

SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812,

0822, 0912

SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622,

0652, 1192

SANSUI 0042, 0142

SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562,

0572

SBR 0052, 0152, 0182

SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042

SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052,

0072, 0432

SEG 0002, 0072

SEI-SINUDYNE 0442

SELECO 0042

SENTRA 0112

SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702

SHINTOM 0002

SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252,

0572

SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442,

0932

SONOKO 0282

SONY 0432, 0552, 0682,

0692, 0942, 0952,

0962, 1122, 1132

STS 0602

SUNKAI 0512

SUNSTAR 0432

SYLVANIA 0432, 0912

SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912

TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522,

0932

TASHIKO 0132, 0432

TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432,

0922

TCM 1142, 1162, 1172

TEAC 0042, 0432

TECHNICS 0462

TEKNIKA 0012, 0432

TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632,

0732, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0882, 0892

TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052

TENOSAL 0002

THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142,

0192, 0402, 0632,

0762

THORN 0042, 0902

THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222,

0302, 0712,

0722, 0742,

0762, 0852,

0862, 0872,

0902

TMK 0522

TONSAI 0002

TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912

TOTEVISION 0012, 0072

TRIUMPH 0922

UHER 0042, 0072

ULTRAVOX 0032

UNITECH 0072

VECTOR RESEARCH

0122

VICTOR 0042, 0102, 0142

VIDEON 1162, 1172

WELTBLICK 0012

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0032

XENON 0162

YAMAHA 0042, 1202

YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072

DVD PLAYER

AKAI 0108

JVC 0168, 0348

KENWOOD 0288

MAGNAVOX 0248

MITSUBISHI 0268

ONKYO 0128, 0248

PANASONIC 0048

PHILIPS 0188, 0248

PIONEER 0208, 0228

PROSCAN 0308

RCA 0308

SAMSUNG 0148

SHARP 0068

SONY 0028

TECHNICS 0048

THOMSON 0328

TOSHIBA 0088, 0248

YAMAHA 0008, 0048

ZENITH 0248

LD PLAYER

AIWA 0137

FUNAI 0137

HITACHI 0047

MAGNAVOX 0077

PANASONIC 0027

PIONEER 0037

RCA 0067

REALISTIC 0137

SAMSUNG 0017, 0087

SONY 0057, 0097, 0107,

0117

VICTOR 0127

YAMAHA 0007

CD PLAYER

ACCUPHASE 0315

ADC 0865

ADCOM 0785, 1015

AKAI 0115, 0125, 0725,

0735, 0745, 0935,

1155

ARCAM 1875

ARCAM-ROTEL 0165

AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835

AUDIOSONIC 0155

AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245,

1765, 1915, 1935

BSR 0875

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB

1075

CARRERA 0555, 0875

CARVER 0825, 1415

CYRUS-ROTEL 0205

DENON 0045, 0955, 1045,

1595, 1795, 1805

DUAL 1005

ELIN 0185

EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675

FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605,

0825, 1165, 1175

GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855,

0875, 0995, 1265,

1285, 1345, 1355,

1485, 1575, 1675,

1715, 1825

GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195,

1585

GRUNDIG 0175

HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495,

0565, 1135,

1145, 1155

HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685,

0945, 1005, 1015,

1225, 1545

INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015

ITT-NOKIA 0185

JVC 0385, 0395, 0455,

0575, 0585

KARCHER 0485

KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145,

0215, 0595, 0675,

0695, 0705, 0715,

0925, 1355, 1485,

1575, 1675, 1715,

1825

KORTING 0175

LIFETEC 2015

LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645,

1655, 1665

LINN 0165, 1875

LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795,

0805, 1295, 1305,

1555, 1925

08V800RDS_code(GB) 8/29/0, 10:00 AM4

LUXOR 0185, 1895, 1905

MAGNAVOX 1865, 1875

MARANTZ 0165, 0175, 0545,

0665, 1275, 1335,

1405, 1505, 1875,

1955

MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605

MCS 0535

MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005,

2015

MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265,

1275, 1285, 1675

MGA 1125

MICROMAXX 2015

MISSION 0165, 1875

MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205

NAD 0135, 0255, 0285,

0295, 0305, 0345,

0755, 0765, 1315,

1325

NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565

NEC 0405, 0535, 0775,

0785

NECKERMAN 0155, 0225

NIKKO 0835, 1165

OCEANIC 0185

OKANO 0155, 0225

ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425,

1455, 1515

PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615,

1625

PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195,

1865, 1875

PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425,

0435, 0445, 0525,

0855, 1035, 1945

PROTON 0905, 1875

QUASAR 1075

RADIOLA 1845, 1855

RADIOTONE 0485

REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265,

1275, 1285, 1575

ROTEL 1875

SABA 1005

SAE 1875

SALORA 0185

SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975,

0985, 1255, 1675,

1875

SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845,

0915

SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855

SCOTT 1285, 1675

SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025,

1115, 1275, 1635,

1785, 1815, 1825,

1835

SHERWOOD 1275, 1445

SIEMENS 1085

SIGNATURE 1155

SONY 0345, 0355, 0365,

0375, 0865, 1685,

1695, 1705, 1715,

1725, 1735, 1745

SYLVANIA 1875

TANDBERG 1885

TASHIKO 1525

TCM 1985, 2015

TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275,

1365, 1375, 1395,

1435, 1465, 1475

TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065,

1075, 1625

TELEFUNKEN 1005

THETA DIGITAL 1865

THOMSON 1005

TOSHIBA 0755, 0765

VECTOR RESEARCH

0555, 0865

VICTOR 0575

YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 1815,

0085, 0345, 0615,

0655, 0815, 0835,

0895

CD RECORDER

YAMAHA 0244

MD RECORDER

YAMAHA 0024, 0224, 0234

KENWOOD 0214

SONY 0224

TAPE DECK

AKAI 0124

DENON 0204

GRUNDIG 0134

HARMAN 0044

JVC 0194

KENWOOD 0164

KORTING 0134

LUXMAN 0054, 0064, 0074,

0084

MARANTZ 0134, 0144

NAD 0174

ONKYO 0184

PHILIPS 0134, 0144, 0154

PIONEER 0034, 0114

SONY 0094, 0104

YAMAHA 0004, 0014

08V800RDS_code(GB) 8/29/0, 10:00 AM5

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia ID

V624940-2

RX-V800RDS

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

G B

RX-V800RDS

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

0100V800RDS(GB)-cv1/4 10/3/0, 9:14 AM1

u/d

Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R)

Quick Reference Card

TAPE/MD (CD-R)

AMP/TUN

DSP/TUN

INPUT

p Play

r Rec/Pause

(tape/MD)

DSP

b DIR A (tape)

Skip – (MD/CD-R)

w Rewind (tape)

Search (MD/CD-R)

Numeric buttons

p Play

DISC SKIP –/+

DSP

b Skip –

w Search

INDEX

INPUT

+10

DISPLAY

e Pause

a Skip +

s Stop

f Search

AV POWER

PRESET –/+

DSP

A/B/C/D/E

j / i

Input

selector

buttons

DSP

program

group

buttons

EFFECT

INPUT

DSP

program

group

buttons

EFFECT

6.1/ES

INPUT

SET MENU

STANDBY

TEST

Input

selector

buttons

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TV POWER

TV VOLUME

TV INPUT

POWER

VOLUME +/–

SLEEP

MUTE

V624990-1

+10 (MD/CD-R)

Deck A/B (tape)

DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)

e Pause (MD/CD-R)

a DIR B (tape)

Skip + (MD/CD-R)

s Stop

f Fast

forward (tape)

Search (MD/CD-R)

AV POWER

INDEX (CD-R)



A/B/C/D/E

Quick Reference Card

Press this button twice to start recording.

Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement.

Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten.

Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in.

V624990-1

*1 Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.

Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar.

Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.

DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD)

DSP

DVD/LD DVD MENU

CBL/SAT

VCR

INDEX/Time (DVD)

Chapter/Time (LD)

INPUT

Numeric buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

+10

DISPLAY

e Pause

a Skip + (DVD)

Skip/Chapter + (LD)

s Stop

f Search

AV POWER

Numeric

buttons

AV POWER

Numeric buttons

AV POWER

p Play

b Skip – (DVD)

Skip/Chapter – (LD)

w Search

DISC SKIP –/+

Return

DSP

INDEX

+10

INPUT

DISPLAY

Menu up

Menu right

Menu down

Menu select

Menu left

TITLE

Ch enter/

Recall

INPUT

DISPLAY

_/_ _

e Pause

s Stop

f Fast

forward

p Play

w Rewind

TV INPUT

TV VOL +/–

POWER

CH –/+

DSP

Ch enter/

Recall

_/_ _

INPUT

DISPLAY

VCR pause

VCR stop

VCR fast

forward

VCR power

TV SLEEP

TV MUTE

VCR play

VCR REC

VCR rewind

CH –/+

DSP

VCR REC

CH –/+

DSP

Ch enter

INPUT

_/_ _

DISPLAY/

Guide

(SAT)

Menu up

right

down

select

Menu left

Recall

A/B/C/D/E

Documenttranscriptie

GB RX-V800RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V800RDS(GB)-cv1/4 1 RX-V800RDS Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V624940 8/29/0, 10:02 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/ or liquid drops inside this unit. II CAUTION II INTRODUCTION CONTENTS CONTENTS ........................................................... 1 FEATURES ............................................................ 2 GETTING STARTED ........................................... 3 Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ........................ 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP .............................................. 11 CONNECTIONS ................................................. 12 Before Connecting Components ............................ 12 Connecting Audio Components ............................. 12 Connecting Video Components .............................. 14 Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 16 Connecting to an External Amplifier ..................... 18 Connecting an External Decoder ............................ 18 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ....................... 19 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 19 OSD Modes ............................................................ 20 Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 20 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ......................... 21 Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1E .................................................... 21 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ...................................................... 47 SLEEP TIMER .................................................... 48 Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 48 Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 48 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................. 49 Selector Dial ........................................................... 49 Commonly Used Buttons in Any Position of the Selector Dial ....................................................... 50 Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit ...................................... 50 Button Names and Functions in Each Position ...... 51 Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 54 Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) ................................................... 55 Returning to the Factory Setting ............................ 56 ADVANCED OPERATION ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ......................... 20 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 39 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 40 2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 42 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) .............................. 43 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 43 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) ......... 43 6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 44 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 44 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 44 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 44 10 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ............... 45 11 DTS LFE LEVEL ............................................ 45 12 6.1/ES AUTO ................................................... 45 13 SP DELAY TIME ............................................ 46 14 DISPLAY SET ................................................. 46 15 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 46 BASIC OPERATION Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 11 Speaker Placement ................................................. 11 SET MENU .......................................................... 39 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................... 4 Remote Control ........................................................ 6 Description of the Numeric Buttons ......................... 7 Using the Remote Control ........................................ 8 Front Panel Display .................................................. 9 Rear Panel .............................................................. 10 ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ......................................... 22 BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 24 Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26 Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 28 Normal Stereo Reproduction .................................. 29 TUNING ............................................................... 30 RECEIVING RDS STATIONS .......................... 35 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 57 CINEMA DSP Programs ....................................... 58 MOVIE THEATER Programs ................................ 61 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ......................................................... 62 What is a sound field? ............................................ 62 Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 62 Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 63 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 63 Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions .......... 64 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 68 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 73 English Description of RDS Data ........................................ 35 Changing the RDS Mode ....................................... 35 PTY SEEK Function .............................................. 36 EON Function ........................................................ 37 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................. 57 APPENDIX Connecting the Antennas ........................................ 30 Automatic (or Manual) Tuning .............................. 31 Presetting Stations .................................................. 32 Tuning in to a Preset Station .................................. 33 Exchanging Preset Stations .................................... 34 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Before You Begin ................................................... 22 Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 22 BASIC RECORDING ......................................... 38 1 Thank you for selecting this YAMAHA AV receiver. FEATURES Built-in 5-Channel Power Amplifier Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) Center: 100 W (8 Ω) Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 15 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks ◆ Sleep Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes and “Learning” Capability Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP) Dolby Pro Logic Decoder Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 Decoder DTS/DTS ES Decoder CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ◆ Automatic Preset Tuning ◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) ◆ Multi-Functions for RDS Broadcast Reception • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. 2 Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround” and “DTS ES” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. Remote control AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Quick Reference Card PREPARATION Manganese batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Quick Reference Card A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERAIONT 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. 3 If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. Note • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. APPENDIX ■ Notes on batteries As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these conditions, change all of the batteries. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 1 ■ Changing batteries ADVANCED OPERATION Installing Batteries in the Remote Control • Change the batteries periodically. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. English 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 3 2 4 5 6 INPUT VOLUME 7 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT EDIT PHONES EFFECT ON OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL PROGRAM DSP – SILENT PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EDIT 8 9 0 qw e r ty + – u EON MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO i PTY SEEK MODE START opa s df 1 STANDBY/ON 6 VOLUME Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor + VIDEO AUX gh 7 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). 8 SPEAKERS A/B Receives signals from the remote control. Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. 3 Front panel display 9 BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 9). When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1D LFE/ BASS OUT” is set to SWFR. 4 INPUT MODE Selects the mode of input for sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit (see page 26). You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH INPUT as the input source. 5 INPUT l / h Selects the input source (DVD, D-TV/LD, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, VCR 2/DVR, V-AUX, PHONO, CD, TUNER, CD-R, MD/TAPE) you want to listen to or watch. 4 0 PROCESSOR DIRECT ON/OFF When pushed in (ON), BASS, TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of the original signal. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS a RDS MODE/FREQ Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off. If you turn off the output of these speakers by using EFFECT, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the main left and right channels. When Dolby Digital or DTS signals are mixed, the left and right main channel signal levels may not match. When an RDS station is received, press this button to change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or frequency display mode in turn. w A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). e PROGRAM l / h r PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears next to the band indication on the front panel display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. t PHONES jack y VIDEO AUX jacks Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset station number and tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Switches the reception band between FM and AM. f PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. g BASS Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the low-frequency response. h TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the high-frequency response. Note • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you are not operating the controls behind the front panel door, close the door. o MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. p TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) D I G I T A L APPENDIX Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION i FM/AM Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. ADVANCED OPERATION u PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) d PTY SEEK MODE BASIC OPERAIONT Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers. Press this button to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to tune in to a radio program of that type automatically. PREPARATION Selects the DSP program (see page 28). s EON INTRODUCTION q EFFECT To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. English 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes the basic operation of this unit with the remote control. First, set the selector dial to the AMP/ TUN position. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 49 to 56 for full details. 3 Numeric buttons (Input selector buttons) These buttons select the input source. See pages 7 and 8 for the numeric buttons. 4 TEST Outputs the test tone. 1 2 9 0 Select the AMP/TUN position. q 5 ON SCREEN Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor. 6 j/i Adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items. 7 LEVEL Selects the effect speaker channel (center, rear and subwoofer) so you can adjust their output level independently. 8 SLEEP 3 Sets the sleep timer. 9 INPUT EFFECT See page 7. Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the input selector (see page 7). 0 Indicator 4 5 6 7 w A/B/C/D/E Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. q Selector dial e r Turn this dial to select the position for the component to be controlled. (The proper code must be set up for your component. See “Setting the Manufacture Codes” on page 54.) When the position is selected, the remote control is set to that component operation mode. w A/B/C/D/E, PRESET–/+ TV POWER t y TV VOLUME u These buttons are used to select a preset station. A/B/C/D/E: To select one of 5 preset station groups (A to E) PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8) e u/d 8 Select DSP program parameters and SET MENU items. TV INPUT i r SET MENU Enters the SET MENU. t POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 1 DSP Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the DSP program selector (see page 7). 2 Indicator window Shows the name of components which can be controlled. 6 y STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS u VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. i MUTE ■ When selecting a DSP program and turning on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) A INTRODUCTION Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. B EFFECT Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off in the following cases: • When the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position. • While the indicator is lit for about 3 seconds after pressing DSP. PREPARATION Description of the Numeric Buttons The numeric buttons function in various ways depending on the position of the selector dial or the combination of other instructions. Press INPUT regardless of the position of the selector dial. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. 2 You can select an input source with the numeric buttons while the indicator is lit. Press DSP regardless of the position of the selector dial. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. 2 You can select a DSP program with the numeric buttons, turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing EFFECT and turn on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder by pressing 6.1/ES while the indicator is lit. B 1 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN position. 2 You can select a DSP program directly with the numeric buttons, turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing EFFECT and turn on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder by pressing 6.1/ES. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 1 ADVANCED OPERATION Input selector buttons A BASIC OPERAIONT ■ When selecting an input source DSP program group buttons APPENDIX English 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ■ When selecting a preset station number Using the Remote Control D I G I TA L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON TUNER DSP – 30° 1 Set code number “0023” in the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. See page 54 for setting the code. 2 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 3 You can select a preset station number directly with the numeric buttons (1 to 8). See page 34. 8 30° + – + Approximately 6 m (20 feet) The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel Display 2 34 VIRTUAL e r 6 78 PS PTY 90q RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED t y w VOLUME dB ms u i op D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO a q VOLUME level indicator Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on. Indicates the volume level. 2 VIRTUAL indicator w Input source indicator Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP (see page 29). Shows the current input source with the arrow-shaped cursor. 3 g and o indicators e c indicator Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit is reproducing. “ g ” lights up when the builtin Dolby Digital decoder is on. “ o ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. Lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is on. r v indicator t SP A/B indicator 5 DSP program indicators Lights up according to which set of main speakers is selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. Lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 7 RDS mode indicators 8 EON indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. u Multi-information display Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. i MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. o Program type name indicators The name of the selected program type lights up when the “EON” indicator lights up. Lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. p TUNED indicator 9 STEREO indicator a SLEEP indicator Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. Lights up while the sleep timer is on. Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. APPENDIX The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. Illumination of the red indicator next to the RDS data name shows that the corresponding RDS mode is now selected. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6 PTY HOLD indicator y Headphones indicator ADVANCED OPERATION Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. Lights up when you select a DSP program. The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or q/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. BASIC OPERAIONT 1 t indicator 4 x indicator PREPARATION DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB 5 INTRODUCTION 1 English 0 AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 1 2 3 DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE TUNER 5 4 AUDIO R AUDIO L R IN (PLAY) CD-R OPTICAL AM ANT OUT (REC) GND 75 VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT DVD DVD Y D-TV /LD PB/ CB CBL /SAT PR/ CR Y VCR 1 CD PHONO OUT PB/ CB IN PR/ CR VCR 2 /DVR OPTICAL COAXIAL – SPEAKERS – MAIN SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL MAIN L B CENTER + SUB WOOFER – IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON CENTER + – – + MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR L PB/ CB PR/ CR MONITOR OUT CENTER As this terminal is used for an examination in the factory, do not connect any equipment to this terminal. L MONITOR OUT Y OUT SURROUND DIGITAL INPUT AC OUTLETS OUTPUT + MAIN R CBL /SAT 9 D-TV/LD IN D-TV /LD CD + A R UNBAL. CD-R OUT (REC) DVD GND 8 MAINS R IN (PLAY) FM ANT 7 MD/TAPE CD CD-R S VIDEO L 6 SUB WOOFER S VIDEO REAR (SURROUND) MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR R REAR (SURROUND) L VIDEO 6CH INPUT (Europe model) q 0 1 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 8 AC power cord 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks Connect to a power outlet. 3 Antenna input terminals 9 AC OUTLET(S) See page 30 for connection information. Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 19). 4 Audio component jacks 0 6CH INPUT jacks See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. 5 Video component jacks See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. 6 Speaker terminals See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. 7 OUTPUT jacks See page 18 for connection information. 10 See pages 13 and 18 for connection information. q IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch (see page 19). PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m Center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the floor. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case, “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see page 41 for details). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Rear speaker (R) ADVANCED OPERATION The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. Main speaker (R) BASIC OPERATION The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. PREPARATION This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 5-speaker system, using left and right main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. Speaker Placement INTRODUCTION Speakers to Be Used ■ Subwoofer APPENDIX The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION 11 English Some types of speakers interfere with a video monitor. If this problem occurs, move the speakers away from the monitor. If you cannot avoid installing the center speaker or subwoofer near the video monitor, use a magnetically shielded speaker. CONNECTIONS Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals (see page 25 for details). y • You can designate the input for each digital jack according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 44 for details). About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a turntable PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. y • The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It simply reduces noise in the signal. In some cases, you may hear less noise if you do not connect to the GND terminal. 12 ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks. • When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL CD jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape deck or CD recorder y • Only digital signals input from a source such as a CD or DVD are output from the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. • You can connect an MD recorder to any digital input jack by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 44). Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • When you record from a source component connected to this unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this unit. CONNECTIONS OPTICAL INPUT MD recorder or tape deck INPUT OUTPUT R L L R OPTICAL AM ANT OUT (REC) GND FM ANT L UNBAL. CD-R OUT (REC) Y D-TV /LD PB/ CB PR/ CR D-TV/LD Y IN O VCR 1 DVD GND R VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT DVD DVD CD BASIC OPERATION OUTPUT S VIDEO L CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) 75 R R MD/TAPE CD CD-R L AUDIO L IN (PLAY) O CD player AUDIO TUNER R PREPARATION DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE O OPTICAL OUTPUT INPUT L O CD-R OPTICAL OUTPUT CD recorder OUTPUT R INTRODUCTION OPTICAL INPUT PB/ CB OUT D-TV /LD PHONO C COAXIAL OUTPUT PR/ CR IN VCR 2 /DVR OPTICAL COAXIAL MAIN CD CBL /SAT MONITOR OUT Y OUT PB/ CB SURROUND PR/ CR MONITOR OUT (Europe model) CENTER L GND VIDEO 6CH INPUT L R R SURROUND OUTPUT L R MAIN OUTPUT SUBWOOFER OUTPUT CENTER OUTPUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OUTPUT S VIDEO ADVANCED OPERATION DIGITAL INPUT SUB WOOFER External decoder See page 18. Turntable indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX L English 13 CONNECTIONS Connecting Video Components ■ About the video jacks There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composit video signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals. The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) video signals. The jacks are also separated into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction. If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. y Y VIDEO jack (composite) P B/ CB PR/ CR S VIDEO jack COMPONENT VIDEO jacks • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively. • If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary to make composite video connections. If both types of connections are made, this unit gives priority to the S-video signal. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 44 for details). Notes • Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being connected. ■ Video monitor with a 21-pin connector Make a connection as shown on page 15 with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable. ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console to this unit. OPTICAL VIDEO AUX L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT Game console S VIDEO OUT 14 CONNECTIONS Note • If your LD player has an Dolby Digital RF signal output jack, connect it to this unit through an RF demodulator (separately purchased). AUDIO OUTPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT LD player COMPONENT OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT TV/digital TV or LD player VIDEO OUTPUT V S DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE AUDIO TUNER R AUDIO L R IN (PLAY) L AM ANT CD-R OPTICAL OUT (REC) GND FM ANT UNBAL. CD-R OUT (REC) PR/ CR Y IN *1 You can connect the Dolby Digital RF signal output of your LD player to the COAXIAL jack by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 44). VCR 1 GND O RF demodulator D-TV /LD (Europe model) D-TV/LD DVD RF INPUT Y PB/ CB CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) 75 DVD CD PB/ CB OUT D-TV /LD PHONO O *1 MAIN CD CBL /SAT C PR/ CR IN VCR 2 /DVR OPTICAL COAXIAL C VIDEO OUTPUT MD/TAPE CD CD-R VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT DVD S VIDEO L V S MONITOR OUT Y OUT PB/ CB SURROUND CENTER DIGITAL INPUT ADVANCED OPERATION PR/ CR MONITOR OUT SUB WOOFER S VIDEO VIDEO 6CH INPUT L R AUDIO OUTPUT V L R L R S S Cable TV or Satellite tuner COAXIAL OUTPUT S VIDEO OUTPUT V V S VIDEO INPUT VIDEO OUTPUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION S S VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT VCR 1 or VCR 2/ DVR (digital video recorder) AUDIO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT APPENDIX No connection indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables V indicates video cables S V S V VIDEO INPUT SCART-plug indicates S-video cables R S VIDEO INPUT COMPONENT INPUT Video monitor 15 English L BASIC OPERATION R DVD player S VIDEO OUTPUT R L COMPONENT OUTPUT PREPARATION S VIDEO OUTPUT INTRODUCTION RF OUTPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT CONNECTIONS Connecting the Speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 2 ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 2 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. 3 ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or B terminals. ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 16 CONNECTIONS Main speakers B Main speakers A Right Left Left (Europe model) INTRODUCTION Right MAINS – SPEAKERS – AC OUTLETS OUTPUT + PREPARATION + R L SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL A MAIN R L MAIN B CENTER + SUB WOOFER – IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON CENTER + – – + L MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 :8 REAR MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER BASIC OPERATION R MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 CENTER :6 :6 REAR R REAR (SURROUND) L REAR (SURROUND) ADVANCED OPERATION Subwoofer connection See “SUBWOOFER jack” on page 18. Right Center speaker Left Rear speakers Subwoofer system ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting to an External Amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the OUTPUT jacks as follows. Note • When RCA pin plugs are connected to the OUTPUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Connecting an External Decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. OUTPUT Notes MAIN 1 R L 2 SUB WOOFER CENTER 3 4 R REAR (SURROUND) L 1 MAIN jacks Main channel line output jacks. Note • The signals output through these jacks are affected by the BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION settings. 2 SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. The subwoofer volume cannot be adjusted from this unit. • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “10A LFE LEVEL” and “11 DTS LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 3 CENTER jack Center channel line output jack. 4 REAR (SURROUND) jacks Rear channel line output jacks. 18 • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items 1A to 1E on the SET MENU is not affected. CONNECTIONS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch Select the left or right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. Switch Speaker position MAINS If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL Left Main If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR Main The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. Right Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. BASIC OPERAIONT IMPEDANCE SELECTOR MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR Impedance level PREPARATION (Europe model) INTRODUCTION WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. ADVANCED OPERATION IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Connecting the Power Supply Cords After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you will not use this unit for a long period of time. (Europe model) MAINS AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER REAR APPENDIX IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Europe model ............................................... 2 OUTLETS U.K. model ..................................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) To AC outlet English SWITCHED 19 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. Selecting the OSD Mode 1 When you turn on the power, the video monitor and front panel display show the level of the main volume for a few seconds and then switch to show the current DSP program. 2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. y • If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “14 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU (see page 46). OSD Modes You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Full display This mode always shows the DSP program parameter settings on the video monitor (see page 63). Short display This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Display off This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button. P01 CONCERT HALL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS 45ms 1.0 5 P01 CONCERT HALL Full display Short display y • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front panel display. • The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. 20 Notes • If you choose a video input source that has a component connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks. However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video and composite video signals. • If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1E Description Initial setting 1A CENTER SP Selects the center channel output mode according to the size of the center speaker. The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE. LRG 1B MAIN SP Selects the main channel output mode according to the size of the main speakers. The possible settings are LARGE and SMALL. LARGE 1C REAR L/R SP Selects the rear channel output mode according to the size of the rear speakers. The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE. 1D LFE/BASS OUT Selects a speaker for the LFE signal output and low bass signal. The possible settings are SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, and BOTH. BOTH 1E MAIN LEVEL Selects the output level for the main channel signal. The possible settings are Normal and –10 dB. Normal PREPARATION Item INTRODUCTION This unit has 5 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change the settings on the SET MENU (see page 39). LRG BASIC OPERAIONT ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 21 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS This section explains how to adjust the speaker output levels by using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. Note • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the 5 speakers required for a surround sound system. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position with the remote control. After completing the adjustments, use VOLUME +/– at your listening position to check if the adjustments are satisfactory. 2,6 1 Before You Begin 5 4 1 INPUT VOLUME 3 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON EDIT PHONES OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP – SILENT + + VIDEO AUX 2 3 1 – 3 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power. Turn on the video monitor. Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 2 Press TEST to output the test tone. 3 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard from the left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. STANDBY /ON 2 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. 3 Set BASS and TREBLE on the front panel to the center position and set BASS EXTENSION to OFF. BASS 1 SPEAKERS A B LEFT RIGHT (TEST LEFT) (TEST RIGHT) TREBLE BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT – + – + ON OFF CENTER (TEST CENTER) Set to OFF. LEFT SURROUND (TEST L SUR.) 22 RIGHT SURROUND (TEST R SUR.) ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT CONNECTIONS LEVELS The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. LEFT y • The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using “5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 43). • You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers (center, left rear and right rear) to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1E MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 42). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1E MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. PREPARATION • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. Note • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. 4 BASIC OPERAIONT Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker to be adjusted. y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker to be adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in the reverse order.) 6 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. The test tone stops and the current DSP program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press j / i repeatedly to adjust the output level of the effect speakers so that the output level coming from each speaker is the same. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. ADVANCED OPERATION 5 INTRODUCTION TEST DOLBY SUR. y APPENDIX English 23 BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK When using the remote control, set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position. 1 3 5 INPUT VOLUME 3 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS 3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons) to select the input source. • The current input source is indicated on the front panel display with an arrow. • The current input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor for a few seconds. TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON EDIT PHONES OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL INPUT DSP + – SILENT – + VIDEO AUX or 2 5 5 6 Front panel 6 VIRTUAL 1 3 DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB Remote control PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO 5 Selected input source Select this: 1 Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to turn on the power. Turn on the video monitor. The front panel display and the video monitor show the level of the main volume for a few seconds and then switch to show the current DSP program. DVD: D-TV/LD: CBL/SAT: VCR 1: VCR 2/DVR: V-AUX: STANDBY /ON or Front panel 2 24 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. Remote control SPEAKERS A B Front panel PHONO: CD: TUNER: CD-R: MD/TAPE: To reproduce the signal from this component DVD player TV or digital TV/LD player Cable TV/satellite tuner Video cassette deck 1 Video cassette deck 2/digital video recorder Another A/V component (connected to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel) Turntable CD player AM/FM tuner CD recorder MD recorder/tape deck BASIC PLAYBACK 6 Use the digital sound field processor. See page 28. INTRODUCTION To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. PROGRAM 6CH INPUT or or Front panel Remote control Front panel Remote control ■ To mute the sound 5 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. VOLUME or Front panel Remote control TREBLE • You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as VOLUME +/–. • During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set this unit in the standby mode. ■ Notes on the digital signal The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: 1. The following indication will appear on the front panel display. BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VIRTUAL – + – + ON OFF Front panel Note PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO 2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. Note • If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL or “1D LFE/BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. 3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on page 47 cannot be made. APPENDIX • If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered. In these cases, turn on the component. DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASS y ADVANCED OPERATION Adjust the volume to the desired output level. If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION etc. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. Press MUTE on the remote control. To restore the audio output to the previous volume level, press MUTE again. BASIC OPERATION 4 PREPARATION Notes • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. • If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press 6CH INPUT. English 25 BASIC PLAYBACK ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) Select a source from the video group and then select a source from the audio group with the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does not work if you select the sources with INPUT l / h on the front panel. AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. Notes Input Modes and Indications This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the priority of the input signal. When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page 44 for details). Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor. INPUT MODE or Front panel VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB Remote control PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms Input mode 26 D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is selected. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source. • The sound output may be interrupted for some LD and DVD players in the following situation: The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is performed while playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, and then disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital signal was selected again. BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on playing a source encoded with a DTS signal PREPARATION • For LD software that does not contain a digital soundtrack, connect the LD player to the analog jacks and set the input mode to AUTO or ANALOG. • If the LD player is transmitting a signal by a nonstandard method, this unit cannot detect the Dolby Digital or DTS signal. In this case, the decoder automatically switches to PCM or analog. • Some A/V components such as LD players output different audio signals through their analog and digital jacks. Change the input mode as necessary. • While you are operating the LD player and playing a disc encoded with a Dolby Digital signal, if you switch from the pause or chapter forwarding function to normal playback, you may hear the PCM or analog sound an instant before the Dolby Digital signal is played. INTRODUCTION BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to AUTO, there will be a moment of noise while the unit recognizes the DTS signal and turns on the DTS decoder. This is not a malfunction. You can avoid this by setting the input mode to DTS beforehand. • If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode setting left to AUTO, this unit automatically switches to the “DTS-decoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up on the front panel display.) The “t” indicator will flash immediately after playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is flashing. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. • The “t” indicator will flash when the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed while playing back a source encoded with a DTS signal. If this status continues for 30 or more seconds, the unit will automatically switch from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out. ■ Notes on playing an LD source APPENDIX English 27 BASIC PLAYBACK 2 Selecting a Sound Field Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see pages 57 to 60. INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS Use the numeric buttons to select the desired program before the indicator goes off (or press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly on the front panel). • For example, to select the sub-program “Spectacle”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly. • The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON OFF EDIT PHONES MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP – SILENT + – + VIDEO AUX PROGRAM or 2 Front panel 1 Remote control Program group VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB 2 DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO Program name (sub-program) Notes 1 Press DSP on the remote control. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. Remote control y • If the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position, skip this step. 28 • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder Normal Stereo Reproduction Press EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. EFFECT or Remote control Front panel DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP MEMORY TUNED VOLUME D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO The “ c ” indicator lights up. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA DSP y • If the selector dial is set to a position other than the DSP/TUN position, first press DSP and then EFFECT on the remote control. Notes • If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the center and rear speakers. • If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effect or if you set “10B D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. BASIC OPERATION You can experience the virtual CINEMA DSP sound field by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP program. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by using the main speakers. You can also listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Remote control PREPARATION VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB INTRODUCTION If you want to use the Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software, press 6.1/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder (see “12 6.1/ES AUTO” on pages 45 and 60 for details). ADVANCED OPERATION Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases: – when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal or DTS/ Normal program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. APPENDIX English 29 TUNING Connecting the Antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) (Europe model) DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE CD-R OPTICAL TUNER 3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. 5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. AM ANT GND CD CD-R 75 UNBAL. y FM ANT • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. DVD GND D-TV /LD Notes OPTICAL COAXIAL • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. CD CBL /SAT DIGITAL INPUT Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connecting a coaxial cable to the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT terminal. 1 2 Note • Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 2 Cover Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. Lead wire Cut the lead wire and remove it. 5 4 Antenna stand 1 2 30 Unit: mm (inch) 3 1 3 4 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal hole. Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. Clamp with pliers. 5 Clamp with pliers. Insert the wire into the slot. Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. Snap the cover into place. TUNING y Automatic (or Manual) Tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE INTRODUCTION • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. • When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. If an RDS station that offers the PS data service is being received, the station name is shown instead of the frequency on the front panel display. D I G I T A L If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS TREBLE 3 TUNER SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON OFF EDIT PHONES MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP – SILENT + – + VIDEO AUX PREPARATION Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. TUNING MODE 4 2 3 AUTO/MAN'L MONO Press INPUT l / h to select TUNER as the input source. 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. INPUT PRESET /TUNING EDIT FM/AM VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB PS Turn this indicator off. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. 4 AUTO AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET /TUNING Note VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB PS PTY • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINM ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED ADDITIONAL INFORMATION EDIT Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. PRESET/ Hold down the button to TUNING continue the tuning search. Lights up If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. dB ms Turn this indicator off. 4 CT ADVANCED OPERATION TUNING MODE RT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINM ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED or 3 PTY BASIC OPERATION 1 AUTO Goes off APPENDIX Press PRESET/TUNING l or h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher PRESET/ TUNING frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. Press the same button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. English 31 TUNING Notes Presetting Stations ■ Automatically presetting stations (for RDS stations) You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store RDS stations. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in to RDS stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. (See pages 35 to 37 for details on RDS stations.) This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 33). INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Manually presetting stations” on page 33. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only RDS stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 33. (There may be a case that this unit cannot receive a station which could be received by using the automatic tuning method. This is because this unit receives a large amount of PI (Program Identification) data along with the station.) TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON EDIT PHONES OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP – SILENT + + – VIDEO AUX 132 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB PS PTY RT Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 ZO NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP SLE PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 32 Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which the unit will store RDS stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after pressing MEMORY in step 3): 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. dB ms TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 5 INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON OFF EDIT PHONES MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO VIRTUAL MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB DSP – SILENT + – + VIDEO AUX PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX INTRODUCTION Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear on the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. Shows the displayed station has been stored as A1. 6 2,5 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes 1 Tune in to a station. See page 31 for tuning instructions. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY Flashes 3 You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can also tune a preset station with the remote control. Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position and press TUNER to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP MEMORY TUNED PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT ENTERTAINM SPEAKERS A B A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ ON dB ms OFF EDIT PHONES MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO PTY SEEK BASS TREBLE MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP – SILENT 4 EON TUNER BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher PRESET/ TUNING preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. + – + VIDEO AUX ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 2 ADVANCED OPERATION Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication. Tuning in to a Preset Station BASIC OPERATION MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. PREPARATION 3 4 APPENDIX 2 1 English 33 TUNING 1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. A/B/C/D/E Exchanging Preset Stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. or INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E D I G I T A L Front panel Remote control D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET –/+) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. PRESET/ TUNING VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB PS PTY RT CT VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX OFF PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EDIT PHONES MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO EON PTY SEEK BASS TREBLE MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL – + + – VIDEO AUX 2,4 1 Tune in to preset station “E1”. See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on page 33. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO PRESET /TUNING 3 PTY VIRTUAL CT ZONE 2 SLEEP PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED dB ms Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET /TUNING EDIT VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE ZON 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLE SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. 34 RT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON DOLBY DIGITAL NEWS INFO AFF AFFAIRS SPORT PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY T Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the buttons on the front panel. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB 4 PS VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB EDIT y • You can select the preset station number with the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control if code number “0023” has been set up in the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. PROGRAM DSP SILENT Remote control DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON or Front panel A/B/C/D/E TUNER SPEAKERS A B dB ms RECEIVING RDS STATIONS Description of RDS Data This unit can receive PI, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data when receiving RDS broadcasting stations. The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): RDS MODE /FREQ PS mode PTY mode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with under-bars. ADVANCED OPERATION The program type on the RDS station being received is displayed. There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. You can make this unit search for a station which is broadcasting a program of the desired type. See page 36 for details. Notes • When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on the front panel display. If you press the button before the indicators light up on the front panel display, the mode cannot be changed. This is because the unit has not yet received all of the RDS data on the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. Although the reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the display to RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: The four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS data. When an RDS station is being received, PS, PTY, RT and/or CT mode indicators that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up on the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/FREQ repeatedly to change the display mode among the RDS data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown below. Illumination of the red indicator next to the RDS mode indicator shows that the corresponding RDS mode is now selected. PREPARATION RDS data contains various information such as PI (Program Identification), PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations. Changing the RDS Mode INTRODUCTION RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system by FM stations in many countries. Stations using this system transmit an inaudible stream of data in addition to the normal radio signal. See page 37. APPENDIX RT mode CT mode English Frequency display mode 35 RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ■ To cancel this function PTY SEEK Function Press PTY SEEK MODE twice. If you select the desired program type, the unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. INPUT VOLUME ■ Program types in the PTY mode There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. NEWS AFFAIRS INFO SPORT EDUCATE DRAMA CULTURE SCIENCE VARIED POP M ROCK M M.O.R. M 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON EDIT PHONES OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP + – SILENT 2 1 – + VIDEO AUX 1 3 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” flashes on the front panel display. LIGHT M CLASSICS OTHER M VIRTUAL PTY SEEK MODE START Flashes 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the desired program type. The selected program type appears on the front panel display. PRESET/ TUNING 3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the “PTY HOLD” indicator lights up on the front panel display while searching for stations. Light up PTY SEEK VIRTUAL MODE START DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES PCM B PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED dB ms The selected program type flashes. • If a station that is broadcasting a program of the required type is found, the unit stops at that station. • If the called station is not the desired one, press PTY SEEK START again. The unit begins searching for another station that is broadcasting a program of the same type. 36 News Current affairs General information Sports Education Drama Culture Science Light entertainment Pops Rock Middle-of-the-road music (easylistening) Light classics Serious classics Other music RECEIVING RDS STATIONS 2 EON Function EON Lights up Note VIRTUAL DTS INPUT VOLUME 6.1/ES PCM D I G I TA L SURROUND A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS dB ms BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON OFF EDIT PHONES MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO VIRTUAL DTS MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL 2 SILENT DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO + – + PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP MEMORY TUNED VOLUME VIDEO AUX 6.1/ES PCM dB ms B D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO Flashes • When broadcasting of the required program ends, the previously received station (or another program on the same station) is recalled. 2 1 VIRTUAL DTS 6.1/ES PCM B 2 PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO ZONE 2 INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VIRTUAL DTS 6.1/ES PCM B 2 PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO ZONE 2 INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO ■ To cancel this function Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights up on the front panel display. ADVANCED OPERATION Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up on the front panel display. If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights up. BASIC OPERATION DSP – D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B VOLUME • If a preset RDS station of the selected program type starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically switch from the program being currently received to that program. The program type name indicator flashes. D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP MEMORY TUNED B 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE 2 PREPARATION • This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the front panel display. INTRODUCTION This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you simply select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and switches from the station being currently received to the new station when the broadcasts starts. Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name indicator lights up on the front panel display. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 37 BASIC RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. 2 INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING EFFECT PROGRAM PRESET TUNING RDS MODE /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK BASS TREBLE TUNER SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ON EDIT PHONES OFF MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO MODE START L AUDIO R OPTICAL DSP – SILENT + – + VIDEO AUX 2 1 2 If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. Turn on the power to the unit and all connected component. Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT or Front panel Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. 38 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded as follows: • LDs Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack. • DVDs Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. • CDs The DTS signal recorded on CDs can only be output as a digital bitstream, and therefore cannot be recorded. ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU y INTRODUCTION The SET MENU consists of 15 items including the speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU Adjustment should be made with the remote control. 3,6 4,5 2 1 PREPARATION • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting the items. Note • The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of the OSD. 1 SPEAKER SET 1A CENTER SP 1C REAR L/R SP Note • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 1 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. 1D LFE/BASS OUT 1E MAIN LEVEL 3 L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL 5 CENTER GEQ 6 INPUT RENAME 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT 8 INPUT MODE 9 PARAM. INI SET MENU 1/4 1 SPEAKER SET 2 LOW FRQ TEST 3 L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL / :Up/Down –/+ Enter 3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to 15) you want to adjust. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION LOW FRQ TEST ADVANCED OPERATION 2 SET MENU 1/4 10 DOLBY D. SET 1 SPEAKER SET 2 LOW FRQ TEST 3 L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL / :Up/Down –/+ Enter 10A LFE LEVEL 10B D-RANGE y 12 6.1/ES AUTO • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. 13 SP DELAY TIME 4 15 MEMORY GUARD Press j or i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the video monitor or on the front panel display. APPENDIX 11 DTS LFE LEVEL 14 DISPLAY SET BASIC OPERAIONT 1B MAIN SP 2 LOW FRQ TEST English TEST TONE • • • • • OFF OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R FRQ • • • • • • • • • • 88Hz 39 SET MENU Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE • • • • • OFF OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R FRQ • • • • • • • • • 88Hz 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. You must set the output mode when you use a subwoofer. Notes 5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE • • • • • •ON OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R FRQ • • • • • • • • • 88Hz 6 Press u/d repeatedly until the current DSP program appears or simply press one of the DSP program group button to exit from the SET MENU. or • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items 1B and 1D are possible, but those in items 1A,1C and 1E are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected. ■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker mode) By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, the unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. 1A CENTER SP Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items again. LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS OUT”. 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE 40 SET MENU 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending on how you set this item. 1C REAR L/R SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LRG SML NONE 1B MAIN SP SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS OUT”. 1C REAR L/R SP SMALL ADVANCED OPERATION SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS OUT”. LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have rear speakers. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1C REAR L/R SP 1B MAIN SP LARGE BASIC OPERATION LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. LARGE PREPARATION ■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode) ■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker mode) INTRODUCTION NONE Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signals are directed to the left and right main speakers. LRG SML NONE SMALL y Note APPENDIX • When you select MAIN for “1D LFE/BASS OUT”, the lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”. English 41 SET MENU ■ 1D LFE/BASS OUT (bass out mode) ■ 1E MAIN LEVEL (main level mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. 1D LFE/BASS OUT Choices: Normal, –10 dB Initial setting: Normal Normal Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 1E MAIN LEVEL SWFR MAIN BOTH MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. 1D LFE/BASS OUT Normal –10dB –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 1E MAIN LEVEL SWFR MAIN BOTH BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. 1D LFE/BASS OUT SWFR MAIN BOTH Note • The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main, center and rear channels are directed to the LFE channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B and 1C. Normal –10dB 2 LOW FRQ TEST Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your configuration. Change the setting with the remote control while sitting in the listening position. 1 Press j / i to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you can hear the tone. Notes • Do not turn up the volume too high. • If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. 42 SET MENU 2 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to select the frequency you want to use. 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. ■ About the test tone Digital generator (wide band noise produced) Control range: 10 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 Press i to decrease the output level for the left main speaker. Press j for the right main speaker. 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. Control range (dB): –6 to +3 Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) BASIC OPERATION The test tone is produced by the tone generator. The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter. You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through 250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps. You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the left and right main speakers. 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) Freq. 1 Press d to select a higher frequency and u to select a lower frequency. 2 Press j / i to adjust the level of that frequency. 35 Hz – 250 Hz y Band pass filter APPENDIX • You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST (see pages 22 and 23). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Control range (dB): –6 to +6 Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. Noise Center freq. PREPARATION 3 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) INTRODUCTION Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will not necessarily be output from the selected speakers. The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU. English 43 SET MENU 6 INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display. 1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT l / h) to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 3 Press u/d to select the character you want to use and j / i to move to the next one. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order. A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, and so on. • Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other inputs. Note • You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs. 4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to designate the input for the COMPONENT jacks (A and B) and the DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8) to any sources you want. 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 26 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP program within a DSP program group. When you initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. 1 2 ■ 7A [A] [B] (for the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) Initial settings: [A] DVD [B] D-TV/LD ■ 7B (1) (2) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks) Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE (2) CD-R ■ 7C (3) to (6) (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) Initial settings: (3) CD (4) CD-R (5) DVD (6) D-TV/LD ■ 7D (7) (8) (for the COAXIAL INPUT jacks) Initial settings: (7) CD (8) CBL/SAT Note • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. 44 Press DSP. Press the numeric button (DSP program group button) on the remote control for the DSP program you want to initialize. All of the DSP programs within the selected program group are initialized. y • The asterisk mark (*) next to a DSP program group number indicates that you have changed the parameter values in one or more DSP programs within that group. Notes • You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a group separately. • The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk mark (*). • When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 46), you cannot initialize any program groups. • Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings. SET MENU 10 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ■ 10A LFE LEVEL Control value (dB): –20 to 0 Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –10 to +10 Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE PREPARATION Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the lowfrequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 12 6.1/ES AUTO Use this feature to switch the auto mode of the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder on or off. Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. Dialog level ON Select this to allow this unit to automatically turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder when a signal with the appropriate identification is detected. OFF Select this if you want to turn on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder manually by pressing 6.1/ ES on the remote control. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Output level MAX Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: ON Input level 1.0 0.0 L-LEVEL BST Input level 1.0 Output level Dialog level MIN H-LEVEL CUT 0.0 Dialog level APPENDIX Output level STD ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN Initial setting: MAX for both SP (speaker) and HP (headphones) • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low volume level. BASIC OPERATION ■ 10B D-RANGE (dynamic range) INTRODUCTION This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. 11 DTS LFE LEVEL Input level Note • When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD. English 45 SET MENU 13 SP DELAY TIME 14 DISPLAY SET Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right main speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialog. Center speaker image C C You can set the OSD background to blue if the video source is not being reproduced (or the power of the source component is off). ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. 15 MEMORY GUARD Control range (ms): 0 to 5 L ■ BLUE BACK > AUTO/OFF R Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF Select ON to protect the following features: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode RL RR y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. 46 Notes • When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS Adjustment should be made with the remote control. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or left and right rear speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. 3 1 Notes • If the speaker output mode is set to NONE, the output level of that speaker cannot be adjusted. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear, left rear and subwoofer. ADVANCED OPERATION Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. BASIC OPERAIONT 1 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the output level of the effect speakers you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the output level again. PREPARATION 2 INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening to a music source. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Center speaker output level Right rear speaker output level Left rear speaker output level Subwoofer output level APPENDIX y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in the reverse order.) English 47 SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). 4 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO y • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. Canceling the Sleep Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. Setting the Sleep Timer 2 y • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. 3 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Set the selector dial to a position other than the TV position. 3 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time before this unit automatically turns off. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB 48 PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES This remote control also has a sophisticated feature: Learn. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with a infrared remote control receiver. This feature makes it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room. INTRODUCTION The remote control can operate this unit as well as other YAMAHA A/V components. To control the components from other manufacturers (or some from YAMAHA), you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes. Notes Selector Dial AMP/TUN You can perform the basic operations of this unit. See pages 6 and 7. TAPE/MD The code for a YAMAHA tape deck is factoryset. Be sure to set the proper code when operating an MD recorder or CD recorder. CD The code for a YAMAHA CD player is factory-set. VCR A VCR can be controlled. TV A TV can be controlled. Selector dial DVD/LD & DVD MENU An LD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD position. A DVD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is factoryset. If the remote control does not operate your YAMAHA DVD player, you need to set the code number “0048”. Note • The general operational buttons on the remote control differ depending on the position of the selector dial. See the following pages for details. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DSP/TUN This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected directly. ADVANCED OPERATION CBL/SAT A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled. BASIC OPERAIONT There are 9 positions that you can select to control connected components with this remote control. For example, if the CD position is selected, the remote control is set in the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled by the buttons on the remote control. When turning the selector dial, the position changes as follows: PREPARATION • For the operating distance of the remote contorol and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 8. • For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 to 8. • If the memory on the remote control becomes full, no further learning is possible, even if there are still some programmable buttons available (see page 55). APPENDIX English 49 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Commonly Used Buttons in Any Position of the Selector Dial Regardless of the position of the selector dial, you can control this unit and your TV with the following buttons. Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit The example below describes the procedure for controlling a YAMAHA CD player. Note 1 • You have to set up the code for your TV in the TV position before you can control the TV. 3 4 1 ! @ 2 # 3 4 5 ■ Controlling this unit 1 Set the selector dial to the CD position. 2 Turn on the power. 3 Press INPUT. The indicator lights up for about 3 second. 4 Press CD while the indicator is lit. 5 Press p. See page 51 for the CD player operation buttons. 6 Adjust the volume. See pages 6 and 7. 1 2 3 4 STANDBY POWER VOLUME +/– SLEEP Note • If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial to the TV position, this button is used to set the sleep timer for the TV. 5 MUTE 5 2 6 Note • If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial to the TV position, this button is used to mute the TV sound. ■ Controlling your TV ! TV POWER @ TV INPUT # TV VOLUME +/– 50 If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes listed from page i at the end of this manual, you can control other brands of components. See “Setting the Manufacturer Codes” on page 54 for details. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Button Names and Functions in Each Position INTRODUCTION ■ TAPE/MD position (tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder) Select the TAPE/MD position. Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R) PREPARATION INDEX (CD-R) +10 (MD/CD-R) r Rec/Pause (tape/MD) e Pause (MD/CD-R) p Play A/B/C/D/E f Fast forward (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) w Rewind (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) AV POWER (Tape) This button turns on the tape deck that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. (MD) This button turns on the MD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. (CD-R) This button turns on the CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ CD position BASIC OPERAIONT b DIR A (tape) This button selects the playing direction of deck A. Skip – (MD/CD-R) Deck A/B (tape) This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette tape deck. DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) a DIR B (tape) This button selects the playing direction of deck B. Skip + (MD/CD-R) s Stop Select the CD position. p Play b Skip – DISPLAY • Press the button once to give a pause in operation and press once more to stop operation. e Pause YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop a Skip + s Stop YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop f Search APPENDIX w Search A/B/C/D/E y Pause/Stop function ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD changer) Numeric buttons INDEX +10 AV POWER This button turns on the CD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. Notes You can program a remote control function to all buttons except DSP and INPUT. See “Programming a New Remote Control Function” on page 55. 51 English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. Refer to the operation instructions for your component. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ DVD/LD position Select the DVD/LD position. Numeric buttons INDEX/Time (DVD) Chapter/Time (LD) +10 DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD) DISPLAY p Play A/B/C/D/E b Skip – (DVD) Skip/Chapter – (LD) w Search e Pause a Skip + (DVD) Skip/Chapter + (LD) s Stop f Search AV POWER (DVD) This button turns on the YAMAHA DVD player if you have set up the code number “0048”. Also this button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. (LD) This button turns on the LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. ■ DVD MENU position Note • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. Select the DVD MENU position. Numeric buttons INDEX +10 DISC SKIP –/+ Return Menu select Menu left TITLE DISPLAY A/B/C/D/E Menu up Menu right Menu down MENU AV POWER This button turns on the YAMAHA DVD player if you have set up the code number “0048”. Also this button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. Notes • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. Refer to the operation instructions for your component. You can program a remote control function to all buttons except DSP and INPUT. See “Programming a New Remote Control Function” on page 55. 52 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ VCR position ■ CBL/SAT position Select the CBL/SAT position. VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. A/B/C/D/E Numeric buttons Ch enter/Recall Ch enter _/_ _ _/_ _ CH –/+ DISPLAY CH –/+ e Pause Menu select s Stop w Rewind f Fast forward DISPLAY/ Guide (SAT) A/B/C/D/E Menu up Menu right Menu down MENU Menu left Recall AV POWER This button turns on a cable TV/satellite tuner that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for your cable TV/satellite tuner. ■ TV position BASIC OPERAIONT AV POWER This button turns on a VCR that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for your VCR. PREPARATION p Play Numeric buttons INTRODUCTION Select the VCR position. Note Select the TV position. Numeric buttons Ch enter/Recall VCR REC Press this button twice. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION _/_ _ CH –/+ DISPLAY p VCR play A/B/C/D/E e VCR pause s VCR stop w VCR rewind TV INPUT f VCR fast forward VCR power APPENDIX TV POWER This button turns on a TV that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up TV VOL +/– the code for your TV. ADVANCED OPERATION • You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for it in the VCR position. TV SLEEP TV MUTE Notes You can program a remote control function to all buttons except DSP and INPUT. See “Programming a New Remote Control Function” on page 55. 53 English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. Refer to the operation instructions for your component. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the Manufacturer Code You can set up the code for the manufacturer of your component in each position of the selector dial. 1 2 3 4 5 Turn on your component to be used. Set the selector dial to the desired position for the component (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/LD, etc.). Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash or flashes rapidly several times, repeat step 3 and reenter the code. Press AV POWER (or any other button) to check if you have set up the code correctly. If your component cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Notes • You can set up only one code for one position. • In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions: Be sure to set the selector dial to the DVD/LD position before entering the code for the DVD/LD player. The code set up in the DVD/LD position is also simultaneously set up in the DVD MENU position. You cannot set up the code for a DVD player when the selector dial is set to the DVD MENU position. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, you can program functions from the other remote control’s functions (see page 55 for details). • If you have already programmed a remote control function to a button, the function by programming (see page 55) takes priority over the set up manufacturer code’s function. 54 ■ To use a second (and third) VCR You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/ SAT and DVD MENU positions if a cable TV/satellite tuner or DVD player is not being used. Note • If you want to control a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU position, you must set up the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD position. 1 2 Turn on the VCR to be used. 3 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for the second (and third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash or flashes rapidly several times, repeat step 3 and reenter the code. 5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) to check if you have set up the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Set the selector dial to the CBL/SAT or DVD MENU position. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) Press the button for which you want to program the new function. The indicator lights up. INTRODUCTION If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a manufacturer code is not available, the following procedure needs to be performed. You can program functions to all buttons except DSP and INPUT in all positions of the selector dial other than AMP/TUN and DSP/TUN, so the buttons are programmable independently for each position of the selector dial. 4 Lights up 5 • You can program about 60 buttons. PREPARATION y Press and hold the button on the other remote control that has the function you want to program into this remote control until the indicator goes off. Note Set the selector dial to the desired position for the component to be programmed. 2 Place this remote control and the other remote control about 10 to 40 mm (3/8” to 1-1/2”) apart on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. 3 Press and hold e and p at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions. 7 Press DSP or INPUT, or turn the selector dial to exit from the learning mode. The indicator flashes twice. Notes • Even if the batteries in the other remote control have enough power to transmit signals for operation, they may not have enough power to transmit signals to this remote control. • When the remote controls are either too close together or too far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control. • Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays. Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. APPENDIX Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 4 and 5, the indicator flashes twice and the learning process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 3. • If this remote control cannot receive the signals from other remote control, the indicator flashes rapidly. • When the memory is full, the indicator flashes twice and this remote control cannot acquire any more functions. Clear unnecessary programmed functions to allow this remote control to acquire new functions. • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 5, the indicator flashes twice. This indicates that the learning process is complete and the remote control has exited from the learning mode. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 10 to 40 mm (3/8” to 1-1/2”) Notes ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Goes off BASIC OPERAIONT • This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) English 55 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Returning to the Factory Setting ■ To return to the factory-set codes and to clear the learned functions in all positions 1 2 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. ■ To return to the factory-set codes and to clear the learned functions in each position 1 Set the selector dial to the position for the component to be returned to the factory setting. 2 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. Enter the code number “9990”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. The following codes are factory set. Selector dial position TV CBL/SAT VCR DVD/LD TV Satellite tuner VCR DVD player CD CD player TAPE/MD Tape deck AMP/TUN DSP/TUN this unit this unit Component Code 0101 0006 0002 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player) 0005 (YAMAHA CD player) 0004 (YAMAHA Tape deck) 0003 0013 We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the “Quick Reference Card”. 56 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. INTRODUCTION This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor (DSP). This processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create outstanding audio sound field by selecting a suitable DSP program (this will, of course, depend on what you are listening to) and making desired adjustments. Note PREPARATION • Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. Hi-Fi DSP Programs ■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 5 No. Program (group) Sub-program Features — A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 CHURCH — This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. 3 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 4 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 5 ENTERTAINMENT This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. 5ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Disco ADVANCED OPERATION CONCERT HALL BASIC OPERATION 1 Note • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker. APPENDIX English 57 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM CINEMA DSP Programs ■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 5 to 7 No. Program (group) Sub-program Game Features This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 5 ENTERTAINMENT 6 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 7 MONO MOVIE — This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. ■ For movie programs: Nos. 8 to 10 No. 8 Program (group) Sub-program MOVIE Spectacle 70 mm Spectacle THEATER 1 DGTL Spectacle *1 Spectacle 6.1 *2 DTS Spectacle *1 Input source Features Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Dolby Digital DTS Spectacle ES *2 Sci-Fi 70 mm Sci-Fi Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL Sci-Fi *1 Dolby Digital Sci-Fi 6.1 *2 DTS Sci-Fi *1 Sci-Fi ES *2 58 DTS This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM No. 9 Program (group) Sub-program Input source DGTL Adventure *1 Adventure 6.1 *2 DTS Adventure *1 Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel Dolby Digital This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. DTS INTRODUCTION MOVIE Adventure 70 mm Adventure THEATER 2 Features Adventure ES *2 70 mm General Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL General *1 Dolby Digital General 6.1 * 2 DTS This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. BASIC OPERATION DTS General *1 PREPARATION General General ES *2 ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 59 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM No. Program (group) Sub-program Normal/ 10 q/DTS SURROUND Matrix 6.1/ES Input source PRO LOGIC/Normal Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ Normal *1 Dolby Digital DOLBY DIGITAL/ Matrix 6.1 *2 DTS DIGITAL SUR./ Normal *1 Features The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, the digital sound field processor is not turned on. DTS DTS DIGITAL SUR./ ES *2 Enhanced PRO LOGIC/Enhanced DOLBY DIGITAL/ Enhanced *1 Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel Dolby Digital DOLBY DIGITAL/ Enhanced 6.1 *2 DTS DIGITAL SUR./ Enhanced *1 This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. DTS DTS DIGITAL SUR./ Enhanced ES *2 *1 The Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is off. *2 The Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is on. The “ c ” indicator lights up on the front panel display. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when “12 6.1/ES AUTO” on the SET MENU is set to ON, the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will be selected. • 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to turn the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder on or off during Dolby Digital 5.1channel source or DTS 5.1-channel source playback. Notes • The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “Normal” of the q/DTS SURROUND program. • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker. • The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 5 (Game) and 6 to 9. 60 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER Programs ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect These programs express an immense sound field and a large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater. Presence DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION Surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Right surround DSP sound field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Left surround DSP sound field ADVANCED OPERATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTSequipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field PREPARATION The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. INTRODUCTION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. APPENDIX English 61 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What is a sound field? What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown in the diagram on page 64 for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. 62 Sound Field Program Parameters DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on pages 64 to 67. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Changing Parameter Settings Press u/d to select the parameter. 5 Press j / i to change the parameter value. Adjustments should be made with the remote control. INTRODUCTION You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 4 y • We recommend that you edit the parameter while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display. 3 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN (or AMP/TUN) position. or 3 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. Select a DSP program you want to adjust. Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ■ To reset some of the parameters to the factory-set values ■ To reset all of the parameters to the factory-set values P04 ROCK CONCERT Cursor INIT.DLY LIVENESS REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV.LEVEL 15ms 5 1.6s 100ms 7% Example of the ROCK CONCERT 63 English Parameters Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press u/d. • You cannot change parameter values when “15 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “15 MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 46). APPENDIX Program No. Program name (group) Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within the selected group to the factory-set values (see page 44). This operation resets all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and hold j or i until the value temporarily stops at the factory-set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 6 BASIC OPERATION 1 • When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. PREPARATION 2 4 5 3 1 y SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Note • Not all of the following parameters can be found in every program. ■ INIT.DLY (initial delay) (P.INIT.DLY — for the presence sound field) Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the sound source by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. Control range: 1 – 99 msec Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large room, set it to a large value. Sound source First reflection Time Level Level Level Early reflections Time Time INT. DLY INT. DLY INT. DLY Sound source Reflection surface Large value = 99 ms Small value = 1 ms ■ ROOM SIZE (P.ROOM SIZE — for the presence sound field) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. Level Level Level Sound source Early reflections Time Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 64 Large value = 2.0 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ LIVENESS Function: Sound source INTRODUCTION This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. Control range: 0 – 10 Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.” The “LIVENESS” parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Level Level Dead Time Time Small reflected sound Time Large reflected sound BASIC OPERATION Sound source Small value = 0 PREPARATION Level Live Large value = 10 ■ S.DELAY (surround delay) Function: ■ S.INIT.DLY (surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. Control range: 1 – 49 msec ADVANCED OPERATION This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound field. Control range: 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ S.ROOM SIZE (surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S.LIVENESS (surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control range: 0 – 10 APPENDIX English 65 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ RC.INIT.DLY (rear center initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field. Control range: 1 – 49 msec ■ RC.ROOM SIZE (rear center room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ RC.LIVENESS (rear center liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field. Control range: 0 – 10 ■ REV.TIME (reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Control range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Sound source Early reflections Reverberations Time REV. TIME Short reverberations Reverberations Level 60 dB Level Level Reverberations 60 dB 60 dB Time Time REV. TIME REV. TIME Long reverberations Sound source Small value = 1.0 s 66 Large value = 5.0 s SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ REV.DELAY (reverberation delay) Reverberation Sound source INTRODUCTION This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Control range: 0 – 250 msec Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in the larger acoustic environment. Level Function: (dB) PREPARATION 60 dB Time REV. DELAY REV TIME ■ REV.LEVEL (reverberation level) Level BASIC OPERATION Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Control range: 0 – 100% Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Sound source REV. LEVEL ADVANCED OPERATION Time ■ CT.DELAY (center delay) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ LS.DELAY (left surround delay) ■ RS.DELAY (right surround delay) Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 – 50 msec APPENDIX English 67 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound and/or no picture. Cause Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. 19 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when the unit is in the standby mode. 19 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 16, 17 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 24 16, 17 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 25 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — No picture. There is no S-video connection between this unit and the video monitor, although Svideo signals are being input to this unit. Connect the monitor’s S-video input jack to this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. 68 24 14, 15 19 16, 17 The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 48 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 12 – 17 43 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound from the effect speakers. Cause Remedy Press EFFECT to turn it on. 29 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 57 – 60 25 Raise the level of the center speaker. 47 “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 40 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 5) has been selected. Select another DSP program. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 10. Select another DSP program. “1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 42 “1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 42 42 “1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. The output mode for each speaker (main, center or rear) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 40, 41 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 12, 13 The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to the unit through an MC-head amplifier. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The volume level is low while playing a record. ADVANCED OPERATION A “humming” sound can be heard. 57 – 60 — The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. 47 BASIC OPERAIONT No sound from the subwoofer. 57 – 60 PREPARATION The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. INTRODUCTION The sound effect is off. A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. Refer to page 12 APPENDIX English 69 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page 12 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is only connected to the analog input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the digital input jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “15 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 46 — Turn on the power to the component. 38 12 – 15 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. — There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment, or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. — 70 16, 17 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. 30, 31 There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. 30 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. Use the manual tuning method. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 30 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). 32 30, 31 BASIC OPERAIONT There are continuous AM crackling and hissing noises. 30, 31 PREPARATION FM stereo reception is noisy. INTRODUCTION Cause There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM FM antenna. Remedy Refer to page Problem ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 71 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The unit or other component cannot be controlled. Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition the unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The component to be controlled has not been selected. Set the selector dial to the appropriate position, corresponding to the component to be controlled. 49 Cause — The remote control cannot control system components. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. The manufacturer code has not been set up properly. Enter the code again. 54 Depending on the manufacturer or the model, some components cannot be controlled with this unit’s remote control even though the code has been set up properly. Program functions from the other remote control’s function into this remote control. 55 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 55 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. 55 Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary functions. 55 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. 72 SPECIFICATIONS FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms ............................... 100 W 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms ................................................ 105 W • Tuning Range .................................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • DIN Standard Output Power 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms .................................................. 140 W • IEC Output Power 1 kHz, 0.04%, 8 ohms ......................................................... 105 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms .............................................. 80 or more • Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB AM SECTION • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 ohms, Main L/R .......................... 0.04% • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kohms terminated) to Main L/R .................. 60 dB/45 dB GENERAL • Power Supply ......................................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz • Power Consumption .................................................. approx. 300 W Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.2 W • AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe model] ..................................................... 2 (SWITCHED) [U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (SWITCHED) • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz BASS EXTENSION ................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz • Dimension (W x H x D) ............................ 435 x 171 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17”) • Phones Output ..................................................... 150 mV/100 ohms • Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control ....................................................................................... Batteries ......................................................................... AM loop antenna ...................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ................ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) ................................................................. Quick Reference Card * Specifications are subject to change without notice. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Output Level REC OUT ........................................................ 150 mV/0.9 kohms PRE OUT ............................................................ 2.6 V/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER .................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms • Weight ......................................................................... 15 kg (33 lbs) ADVANCED OPERATION • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .............................................................. 150 mV/47 kohms PHONO ............................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT .............................................. 150 mV/40 – 47 kohms BASIC OPERAIONT • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted) ........................ 81 dB CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB • Tuning Range ......................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz PREPARATION • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms ................................................... 125/160/195/230 W • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ...................................................................... PAL • Composite Video Signal Level ................................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • S-Video Signal Level Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C .................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms APPENDIX • Component Video Signal Level Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms PB/CB, PR/CR ....................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB English 73 LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971 CLATRONIC 1181, 1331 CONCERTO 0791 CONDOR 0761 CONTEC 0151, 1171 CONTINENTAL EDISON 0571, 0651, 0901 CRAIG 1171 CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CROWN 2541 CTC CLATRONIC 0261 CXC 1171 DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511, 2611 DANSAI 0101 DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1691 DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1681 DEGRAAF 0451, 1351 DIXI 0991, 1511 DOMEOS 0101 DORIC 1031 DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611, 1641, 2101 DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621, 2111 DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2121, 2151 DYNATRON 0101 ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031 ELECTRO TECH 1511 ELEKTRONSKA 0771 ELMAN 0261, 1621 ELTA 1511 EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081, 1121, 1171, 1261, 1301 ERRES 0101 ETRON 1981 EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601, 0771, 1091, 1621, 2001 FENNER 0101, 1511 FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281, 2311, 2341 FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281 FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931, 2281 FILMNET 1141 FINLANDIA 0451, 2321 FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491, 0521, 0781, 0811, 0871, 1081, 1411, 1421, 1981, 2051, 2091, 2121, 2151, 2551 TV ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911, 1021, 1081 AIKO 0891 AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231, 1191, 1351, 1591, 1641, 1791, 1891, 1981 AKURA 1331 ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361 ALBIRAL 1971 AMSTRAD 1301, 1511 ANAM 1171 ARC EN CIEL 0571 ARCAM 0571, 0761 ARISTONA 0751 ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641 ASA 0411, 0451, 0521, 0781, 0871, 1021, 1081, 1421, 2051, 2091, 2151, 2551 ASTRA 1511 ATANTIC 0761 ATLANTIC 0761 ATORI 1511 AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511 AUSIND 0491, 1411 AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481, 0491, 0601, 0781, 0951, 1051, 1081, 1391, 1421 BAIRD 1101, 1351 BANG & OLUFSEN 1081 BASIC LINE 1321, 1331 BAUER 1451 BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121, 0131, 0221, 1561 BEKO 2491, 2501 BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241, 0251, 0471, 0741, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1821 BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081 BRITANNIA 0761 BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021, 1081 BSR 0391, 0691, 1621, 1901, 1981 BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331, 1641, 1741, 2131, 2151 BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611 CANDLE 0791 CENTURY 1021, 1081 CGE 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1531, 1611, 1621, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CITIZEN 0791 FIRST LINE FISHER 1981 0021, 0091, 0141, 0511, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2091 FORGESTONE 2281 FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761, 1081, 1451, 1541, 1981 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0021, 0431, 0451, 0591, 1411 FORTRESS 1081 FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981 FUJITSU 1261 FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171, 1181, 1261 FUTURETECH 1171 GBC 0021, 0141, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GEC 0451, 1101, 1281, 2321 GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1281, 1561 GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GENERAL TECHNIC 2681 GENEXXA 0451, 1331 GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761, 0791, 1371, 1491, 1511, 1561, 1621, 1641 GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371, 1641, 2301 GORENJE 0981, 1061 GRAETZ 0451 GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1111, 1351, 1981, 2321 GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1031, 1311, 1521, 1561, 1641 GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471, 0491, 0711, 0741, 1381, 2021, 2041, 2141, 2151 HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141, 0431, 0591, 1561 HANTAREX 0581 HEMMERMANN 0061 HIFIVOX 0331, 0571 HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451, 1261, 1351, 1511, 1641, 1981, 2011 HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031, 0081, 0141, 0291, 0331, 0341, 0451, 0601, 0631, 0701, 1281, 1561, 1601, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1861, 1871, 1881, 1891, 1941, 1981, 2051, 2321, 2341 HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511, 1621 IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1611, 1621, 2201, 2251, 2271 INGERSOL 1511 INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841, 1101, 1331, 1371, 1511, 2011 INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061, 0121, 0181, 0451, 0491, 1081, 1641, 1791, 1821, 1981, 2231 IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331, 1371, 1411, 1511, 2011 ISUKAI 1331 ITT 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 JVC 0071, 0721, 1441, 1581, 1591, 1741, 1791 KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331 KAMOSONIC 0601 KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841, 1091, 1321, 1511, 1561, 2051 KAWASHO 0761 KENDO 0261 KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951, 1981 KONKA 2701 KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021, 1081, 1541 i 08V800RDS_code(GB) 1 8/29/0, 10:00 AM NECKERMANN KTV LENOIR LEYEO LIFETEC 0601, 1171 0601, 1511 1181 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581, 0611, 1081 LOGIC 1691, 2281 LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281 LOWEWE 0831 LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901 LUXMAN 0791 LUXMAN STEREO TUNER 0791 LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181, 0341, 0421, 0451, 0461, 0491, 0601, 0671, 1351, 1371, 1561, 1601, 1911, 1921, 1981 LYCO 1181 MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261, 0581, 0641, 0771, 1021, 1081, 1621, 1981 MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 2001 MANESTH 0101 MARANTZ 0101 MARELLI 1081 MARK 0101 MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601, 0691, 1101, 1151, 1241, 1271, 1301, 1511, 1561, 1681, 1691 MAXIMAL 0071, 1981 MCMICHAEL 1281 MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 MEMOREX 1511 METZ 0231, 0741, 1001, 1041, 1081, 1481, 2071, 2081 MGA 1231 MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491, 1381, 2141, 2151 MISTRAL 2281 MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231, 0661, 1191, 1201, 1231, 1671, 1691, 1741 MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581, 0591, 0761, 0771, 1371, 1431, 2031 MTC 0791 MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601, 0641, 0981, 1321, 1511 MURPHY 0451, 2091 MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031 N.E.I. 0101, 0961 NAD 1341 NEC 0141, 1711, 1721, 1731 NEDIATOR NICAMAGIC NIKKAI 0451, 0601, 0981, 1081, 1561, 1931, 1981, 2211, 2231, 2241 0101 0761 1101, 1331, 1641, 1701, 2011 NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591, 0641, 1381, 1411 NOGAMATIC 0571 NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431, 2461, 2791 NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 1051, 1131, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981 OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321, 0441, 1661 ONCEAS 0601 ONWA 1171 ORION 0061, 0391, 0691, 0851, 1211, 1241, 1251, 1301, 1481, 1511, 1681, 1691, 1981, 2371, 2421 OSAKA 2011 OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011 OSUME 0151 OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121, 0141, 0221, 0601, 1561, 1741, 1981 PAEL 0591, 1411 PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211, 0451, 0701, 1311, 1751, 1961, 2561, 2741 PANORAMIC 2351 PATHE MARCONI 0571 PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591, 1621, 1661, 1971 PAUSA 1511 PAUZA 1511 PERDIO 0891, 1101 PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1611, 1621, 1751, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2451, 2471 PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591, 0621, 0681, 0751, 0761, 1021, 1081, 1281, 2031, 2281, 2291, 2431, 2441, 2511, 2731 PHOENIX 1081 PHONOLA 0751, 1081 PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341, 1821 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0411, 0451, 0491, 0581, 1411 PRANDONI-PROMCE 0451, 0491, 0581 PRIMA PROFEX PROTECH QUELLE 0451 1981 0641, 1181, 1981 0041, 0061, 0121, 0221, 0231, 0391, 0491, 0521, 0601, 0781, 1371, 1381, 1411, 1421, 1641, 1681, 2051, 2091, 2141, 2151, 2201, 2211, 2231, 2241, 2251, 2271, 2551, 2571, 2581 REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451, 0661, 0771, 1081 RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091 RADIOLA 2291 RANK 0481, 2151 RBM 2131, 2151 RBM (UK) 0481 REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641, 1981, 2331 REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081, 1031 REX 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 RFT 0991, 2511 ROADSTAR 1321, 1511 ROTEL 0151 SABA 0291, 0331, 0421, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 0581, 0651, 0731, 0931, 1021, 1071, 1081, 1131, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 SACCS 1971 SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161, 1241, 1301, 1511, 1671, 1681, 1691 SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061, 0071, 0341, 0451, 0671, 1291, 1351, 1521, 1561, 1601, 1641, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1981, 2321 SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581, 0641, 1091, 1371, 1411, 2001 SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841, 0981, 1101, 1181, 1371, 1511, 2011 SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1101, 1111, 1291, 1351, 1691, 1741, 2051, 2091, 2551 SBR 0681, 0751, 1281, 2281 SCHAUB LORENZ 0451 SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091, 0451, 0511, 0591, 0601, 0751, 1321, 1361, 1621, 1641, 2101, 2111, 2291 SCOTT 1171, 1261 SEG 0261, 0601, 0821, 0991 SEI 0641, 0691, 1081, 1301, 1481, 1981 ii 08V800RDS_code(GB) 2 8/29/0, 10:00 AM SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SENTRA 1601 SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191, 1761, 1781 SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581, 0641, 1021, 1081, 1981 SICATEL 1971 SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231, 0451, 0741, 2011, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 SILVER 1181 SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021, 1081 SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101, 0261, 0391, 0641, 0691, 0851, 0941, 1021, 1081, 1241, 1301, 1321, 1481, 1631, 1981 SKANTIC 0451 SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011 SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511 SONY 0141, 0171, 1121, 1681, 1691, 2751 SOUNDESIGN 1171 SSS 1171 STERN 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SUNKAI 0691 SUPRA 0791 TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611, 1021, 1421, 1771, 1791, 2081 TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331, 1531 TASHIKO 0141 TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1681, 1691 TCM 2621, 2641, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 TECHNICS 1311 TECHWOOD 0791 TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261 TELE 1141 TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731, 1821 TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311, 0551, 0731, 1131, 1471, 1591, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1991, 2161, 2171, 2181, 2191, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2521, 2631 TELETECH 1511 TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401, 2411 TENSAI 1331, 2091 TEXET 0601 THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531, 0571, 0631, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1241, 1571, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2531 THORN 0741, 0861, 2091, 2251, 2271, 2281 THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281 TMK 0141, 0791, 1471 TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481, 1221, 1271, 1701, 1741, 1851, 2151, 2801, 2811 TRANS CONTINENS 0451 TRISTAR 2281 TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121 UHER 0431, 0451, 0481, 0491, 0511, 1311, 1541 ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591, 1021, 1081, 1981 UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051 UNIVOX 1971 VEGAVOX 0811 VEXA 0101, 1511 VICTOR 1441, 1591 VIDEOTON 2481 VORTEC 0101, 0651 VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491, 1021, 1081 WALTHAM 0451 WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241 WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 1971, 1981, 2001 WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981 WEGA COLOR 1021 WELTBLICK 0101 WESTON 1621 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0101, 0261, 0431, 0591, 0761, 1401, 1541 YOKO 0601, 1511 ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 ZOPPAS 0451 SATELLITE TUNER AKAI ALBA AMSTRAD 1276 0826, 1276 0166, 0796, 1016, 1026, 1296 ANKARO 0476 AST 0406 ASTRA 0126 BARCOM 0476 BLAUPUNKT 0966 BMC SATELLITE 0106 BRITISH TELECOM 1276 BUSH 0826 BUSH (UK) 0956 CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276 CANAL PLUS (FRANCE) 1536 CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006 COLUMBUS 0616 CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426 DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866 DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476 DRAKE 1516 ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606, 0626, 0666, 0926, 0996, 1046, 1056, 1066, 1106 ELTA 1286 ELTA SAT 0146 EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246 FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186, 0296, 0846, 0956, 1306 FINLUX 0976 FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776 FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636, 1056 GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336 GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956, 0966 HIGH PERFORMANCE 0916 HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966 HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706, 0946 ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886 ITT 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 JEEMON 0146 JERROLD 0846, 0986 JOHANSSON 0246 JVC 1276 KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276, 0366 KOSMOS 0266 KYOSTAR 1036, 1086 LENG 0246 LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356 LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446, 0466, 0506, 1156 MACAB 0356 MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256, 0956 MEDION 1326, 1346 METZ 0966 MICROMAXX 1326, 1346 MITSUBISHI 0966 MORGANS 0596 MURATTO 0406 NEC 0286, 0316, 0766, 0786, 0836 NETWORK 0046 NIKKO 1136, 1146 CABLE TV CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476 CLYDE CABLEVISION 1426 FILMNET 1396, 1436 FRANCE TELECOM 1386 GEC 1426 JERROLD 1416 MOVIE TIME 1466 NSC 1466 PHILIPS 1386 PIONEER 0006 SAMSUNG 1496 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 1486, 1506 STARCOM 1416 STS 1466 TANDBERG 1366 TELE 1436 TELE +1 1436 TELESERVICE 1406, 1476 TUDI 1376 UNITED CABLE 1416 ZENITH 1406 NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156, 1166, 1336 NORSAT 0786 OTTO VERSAND 0966 PACE 0046, 0176, 0296, 0936, 0956, 1306, 1566, 1576 PACE MSS 0946 PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK) 1526 PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706 PALSAT 0396 PALTEC 0706 PANASONIC 0806, 1306 PANSAT 1076 PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476, 0956, 1126, 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216, 1306, 1316 PROSAT 1176 PTT TELECOM 0306, 0896 QUELLE 0966 RADIX 1056 REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786 RFT 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216 SAGEM 1256, 1546 SAKURA 0566, 0816 SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136, 0446, 0456, 0486, 0496, 0576 SAMSUNG 0746, 0756 SAT 0406 SATCOM 0896 SATECO 0646 SECTOR 1266 SEDEA 1096 SENTRA 0416 SIEMENS 0896, 0966 SINTRACK 0906 SKYLAB 0476 SKYSCAN 0876 SONY 0736, 0946 STELLA 0306 STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036, 1086 STV 0636 TANDBERG 1116 TANDY 0916 TANTEC 0616 TATUNG 0516, 0546 TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526, 0556, 1056 TELECOM 0306 TELEMAX 0586 THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076, 0176, 0186, 0956 TOSHIBA 0946 TPS (FRANCE) 1546 TRIAD 0406 UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676, 0716, 0726 US ELECTRONICS 0886 VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076 VTECH 0436 WINERSAT 0246 WISI 0056, 0356, 0376, 0386, 0406, 0656, 1056, 1156 WOLSEY 0916 XCOM MULTIMEDIA 1556 XSAT (FRANCE) 1556 ZEHNDER 0266, 0406 ZENDER 0406 VCR AIWA AKAI 0042, 0352, 0432 0042, 0422, 0492, 0582, 0612, 0642, 0652, 0762, 0912 ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0972 AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452 ANITECH 0002 ANITSCH 1002 ASA 0012, 0052 AUDIOSONIC 0002 BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492 BANG & OLUFSEN 0042 BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812 BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252, 0462, 0672, 0992 BRIONVEGA 0032 BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0512, 0972 BUSH (UK) 0812 CAPEHART 0112 CGE 0042, 0432, 0762 CRAIG 0072, 0482 CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622 DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622 DANSAI 0012 DAYTRON 0112 DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432, 0942 DECCA (UK) 0052 DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432, 0532, 0602 DIXI 0442 DUAL 0042, 0632 DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532 DYNATECH 0432 DYNATRON 0012 ELBE 0122 ELIN 0072 EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202, 0432, 0512, 0522 ERRES 0012 FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722, 0852, 0902, 1012, 1022, 1082 FIDELITY 0432 FINLANDIA 0052, 0532 FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052, 0082, 0262, 0382, 0432, 0462, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0602, 0912 FIRST LINE 0002, 0912 FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532, 0542, 0572, 0592 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0012, 0052 FRONTECH 0112 FUNAI 0432 GBC 0002 GEC (UK) 0022, 0052 GELOSO 0002 GENERAL TECHNIC 1172 GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812, 0952 GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282, 0432, 0502 GOODMANS (UK) 0002 GRAETZ 0022, 0042 GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532, 0572 iii 08V800RDS_code(GB) 3 8/29/0, 10:00 AM NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762, 1152 NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0402, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0792, 0832, 0842, 0872 OLYMPUS 0462 OPTONICA 0132, 0502 ORION 0162, 0202, 0312, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0982 OSAKA 0432 OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432 OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062, 0812 PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462, 0672, 0992, 1092, 1102, 1182 PENTAX 0172, 0602 PERDIO 0432 PHILCO 1062 PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092, 0152, 0182, 0362, 0372, 0382, 0472, 0502, 1072 PHONOLA 0052, 0152 PILOT 0012 PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372, 0472 PORTLAND 0112 PROLINE 0432 PYE 0052, 0152 QUARTZ 0572 QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042, 0052, 0062, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0462, 0522, 0942 RADIONETTE 0022 REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0502, 0532, 0572 RET 1072 REX 0042, 0742, 0782 RICOH 0952 SABA 0042, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0792, 0872 SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0972 SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812, 0822, 0912 SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622, 0652, 1192 SANSUI 0042, 0142 SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562, 0572 SBR 0052, 0152, 0182 SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042 SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052, 0072, 0432 SEG 0002, 0072 SEI-SINUDYNE 0442 SELECO 0042 SENTRA 0112 SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702 SHINTOM 0002 SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252, 0572 GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462, 0602, 0812, 0822 GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092, 0232, 0252, 0262, 0752, 0802 HANSEATIC 0052, 0812 HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922 HCM 0002 HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412, 0442, 0522 HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292, 0432, 0602, 0662, 0812, 1022 IMPERIAL 0072, 0432 INGERSOL 0442 INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072 INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172 INTERFUNK 0022, 0052 IRRADIO 0002, 0012 ITT 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 JENSEN 0042 JVC 0042, 0102, 0142, 0272, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0902 KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812 KENDO 0492 KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572 LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172 LLOYD 0432 LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152 LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442 LUMA 0162 LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812 M ELECTRONIC 0432 MAGNADYNE 0052 MAGNASONIC 0572 MANESTH 0012 MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092, 0122, 0502 MARK 0012 MARTA 0012 MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0812, 0972 MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172 MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0532, 0572 METZ 0062, 0092, 0932 MGA 0912 MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172 MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252 MINOLTA 0172, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142, 0912, 0922 MTC 0072, 0432 MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062, 0282, 0432 MURPHY 0432 N.E.I. 0012, 0052 NATIONAL 0462 NEC 0042, 0122, 0142 NECKERMANN 0032, 0042, 0052, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0522, 0572, 0762, 0812 NIKKAI 0112 NOBLIKO 0092 SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442, 0932 SONOKO 0282 SONY 0432, 0552, 0682, 0692, 0942, 0952, 0962, 1122, 1132 STS 0602 SUNKAI 0512 SUNSTAR 0432 SYLVANIA 0432, 0912 SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912 TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522, 0932 TASHIKO 0132, 0432 TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432, 0922 TCM 1142, 1162, 1172 TEAC 0042, 0432 TECHNICS 0462 TEKNIKA 0012, 0432 TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0882, 0892 TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052 TENOSAL 0002 THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0402, 0632, 0762 THORN 0042, 0902 THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222, 0302, 0712, 0722, 0742, 0762, 0852, 0862, 0872, 0902 TMK 0522 TONSAI 0002 TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912 TOTEVISION 0012, 0072 TRIUMPH 0922 UHER 0042, 0072 ULTRAVOX 0032 UNITECH 0072 VECTOR RESEARCH 0122 VICTOR 0042, 0102, 0142 VIDEON 1162, 1172 WELTBLICK 0012 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0032 XENON 0162 YAMAHA 0042, 1202 YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072 DVD PLAYER AKAI JVC KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MITSUBISHI ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER PROSCAN RCA SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TECHNICS THOMSON TOSHIBA YAMAHA ZENITH 0108 0168, 0348 0288 0248 0268 0128, 0248 0048 0188, 0248 0208, 0228 0308 0308 0148 0068 0028 0048 0328 0088, 0248 0008, 0048 0248 iv 08V800RDS_code(GB) 4 8/29/0, 10:00 AM LD PLAYER AIWA FUNAI HITACHI MAGNAVOX PANASONIC PIONEER RCA REALISTIC SAMSUNG SONY VICTOR YAMAHA 0137 0137 0047 0077 0027 0037 0067 0137 0017, 0087 0057, 0097, 0107, 0117 0127 0007 CD PLAYER ACCUPHASE ADC ADCOM AKAI 0315 0865 0785, 1015 0115, 0125, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0935, 1155 ARCAM 1875 ARCAM-ROTEL 0165 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835 AUDIOSONIC 0155 AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245, 1765, 1915, 1935 BSR 0875 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 1075 CARRERA 0555, 0875 CARVER 0825, 1415 CYRUS-ROTEL 0205 DENON 0045, 0955, 1045, 1595, 1795, 1805 DUAL 1005 ELIN 0185 EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675 FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605, 0825, 1165, 1175 GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855, 0875, 0995, 1265, 1285, 1345, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195, 1585 GRUNDIG 0175 HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495, 0565, 1135, 1145, 1155 HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685, 0945, 1005, 1015, 1225, 1545 INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015 ITT-NOKIA 0185 JVC 0385, 0395, 0455, 0575, 0585 KARCHER 0485 KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145, 0215, 0595, 0675, 0695, 0705, 0715, 0925, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 KORTING 0175 LIFETEC 2015 LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645, 1655, 1665 LINN 0165, 1875 LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795, 0805, 1295, 1305, 1555, 1925 THOMSON 1005 TOSHIBA 0755, 0765 VECTOR RESEARCH 0555, 0865 VICTOR 0575 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 1815, 0085, 0345, 0615, 0655, 0815, 0835, 0895 LUXOR MAGNAVOX MARANTZ 0185, 1895, 1905 1865, 1875 0165, 0175, 0545, 0665, 1275, 1335, 1405, 1505, 1875, 1955 MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605 MCS 0535 MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005, 2015 MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1675 MGA 1125 MICROMAXX 2015 MISSION 0165, 1875 MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205 NAD 0135, 0255, 0285, 0295, 0305, 0345, 0755, 0765, 1315, 1325 NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565 NEC 0405, 0535, 0775, 0785 NECKERMAN 0155, 0225 NIKKO 0835, 1165 OCEANIC 0185 OKANO 0155, 0225 ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425, 1455, 1515 PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615, 1625 PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195, 1865, 1875 PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425, 0435, 0445, 0525, 0855, 1035, 1945 PROTON 0905, 1875 QUASAR 1075 RADIOLA 1845, 1855 RADIOTONE 0485 REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1575 ROTEL 1875 SABA 1005 SAE 1875 SALORA 0185 SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975, 0985, 1255, 1675, 1875 SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845, 0915 SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855 SCOTT 1285, 1675 SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025, 1115, 1275, 1635, 1785, 1815, 1825, 1835 SHERWOOD 1275, 1445 SIEMENS 1085 SIGNATURE 1155 SONY 0345, 0355, 0365, 0375, 0865, 1685, 1695, 1705, 1715, 1725, 1735, 1745 SYLVANIA 1875 TANDBERG 1885 TASHIKO 1525 TCM 1985, 2015 TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275, 1365, 1375, 1395, 1435, 1465, 1475 TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065, 1075, 1625 TELEFUNKEN 1005 THETA DIGITAL 1865 CD RECORDER YAMAHA 0244 MD RECORDER YAMAHA KENWOOD SONY 0024, 0224, 0234 0214 0224 TAPE DECK AKAI DENON GRUNDIG HARMAN JVC KENWOOD KORTING LUXMAN MARANTZ NAD ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER SONY YAMAHA 0124 0204 0134 0044 0194 0164 0134 0054, 0064, 0074, 0084 0134, 0144 0174 0184 0134, 0144, 0154 0034, 0114 0094, 0104 0004, 0014 v 08V800RDS_code(GB) 5 8/29/0, 10:00 AM GB RX-V800RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V800RDS(GB)-cv1/4 1 RX-V800RDS Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V624940-2 10/3/0, 9:14 AM Quick Reference Card AMP/TUN DSP DSP/TUN INPUT DSP INPUT Input selector buttons DSP program group buttons EFFECT PRESET –/+ 6.1/ES A/B/C/D/E TEST j/i A/B/C/D/E u/d SET MENU ON SCREEN LEVEL STANDBY TV POWER POWER VOLUME +/– TV VOLUME DSP program TV INPUT group SLEEP MUTE buttons Input selector buttons EFFECT 6.1/ES TAPE/MD (CD-R) INPUT DSP DIR A (tape) b Skip – (MD/CD-R) w Rewind (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) A/B/C/D/E DSP INPUT Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R) INDEX (CD-R) +10 (MD/CD-R) Numeric buttons Deck A/B (tape) DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) INDEX +10 e Pause (MD/CD-R) r Rec/Pause (tape/MD) p Play CD a DIR B (tape) Skip + (MD/CD-R) s Stop f Fast forward (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) AV POWER DISC SKIP –/+ p Play A/B/C/D/E DISPLAY e Pause b Skip – a Skip + s Stop w Search f Search AV POWER V624990-1 Quick Reference Card DVD/LD DVD MENU INPUT DSP INPUT DSP Numeric buttons Numeric buttons INDEX/Time (DVD) Chapter/Time (LD) +10 INDEX +10 DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD) DISC SKIP –/+ p Play A/B/C/D/E b Skip – (DVD) Skip/Chapter – (LD) w Search DISPLAY e Pause a Skip + (DVD) Skip/Chapter + (LD) s Stop f Search Return Menu select A/B/C/D/E Menu right Menu left Menu down MENU TITLE AV POWER AV POWER TV VCR INPUT DSP CBL/SAT INPUT DSP Numeric buttons Ch enter/ Recall CH –/+ A/B/C/D/E DISPLAY e Pause DSP INPUT Numeric buttons Ch enter/ Recall CH –/+ Numeric buttons CH –/+ _/_ _ _/_ _ *1 VCR REC p Play DISPLAY Menu up *1 VCR REC VCR play A/B/C/D/E DISPLAY VCR pause Menu select A/B/C/D/E Menu left s Stop w Rewind VCR stop VCR fast forward f Fast VCR rewind forward AV POWER TV POWER TV INPUT TV VOL +/– TV SLEEP Recall VCR power Ch enter _/_ _ DISPLAY/ Guide (SAT) Menu up Menu right Menu down MENU AV POWER TV MUTE *1 Press this button twice to start recording. Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement. Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten. Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in. Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. V624990-1